100% found this document useful (2 votes)

2K views535 pages

Access CT: Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual

Uploaded by

ghanem oussama

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

100% found this document useful (2 votes)

2K views535 pages

Access CT: Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual

Uploaded by

ghanem oussama

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 535

Access CT

Gantry Repair and Replacement

Instructions Manual

459800863341
Revision Y

This document and the information contained in it is proprietary and confidential information of Philips and may not be reproduced, copied in
whole or in part, adapted, modified, disclosed to others, or disseminated without the prior written permission of the Philips Legal Department. Use
of this document and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips personnel and Philips customers who have a current and
valid license from Philips for use by the customer's designated in-house service employee on equipment located at the customer's designated
site. Use of this document by unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. Report violation of these requirements to the Philips Legal Department.
This document must be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips' first written request.
This document or digital media and the information contained in it is strictly reserved for current Philips personnel, Philips licensed representatives
and Philips customers who have purchased a valid service agreement for use by the customer's designated in-house service employee on
equipment located at the customer's designated site. Use of this document or digital media by unauthorized persons is strictly prohibited. This
document or digital media must be returned to Philips when the user is no longer licensed and in any event upon Philips' first written request.

© 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved. CSIP Level1

Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual

Safety and Legal Information

To the User of This Manual
The user of this manual is directed to read and carefully review the instructions, warnings and cautions contained herein
prior to beginning installation or service activities. While you may have previously installed or serviced equipment similar
to that described in this manual, changes in design, manufacture or procedure may have occurred which significantly
affect the present installation or service.

Warranty Disclaimer
Philips provides this document without warranty of any kind, implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the
implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose.

Limitation of Liability
Philips has taken care to ensure the accuracy of this document. However, Philips assumes no liability for errors or
omissions and reserves the right to make changes without further notice to any products herein to improve reliability,
function, or design. Philips may make improvements or changes in the product(s) or program(s) described in this
document at any time.

Password Notice
The PASSWORD is the property of Philips Healthcare and is provided for the exclusive purpose of providing access to
selected service utilities which are described in this service manual as being associated with the password. Use of this
password for any purpose other than for the access to the selected services utilities is strictly prohibited.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 2

Safety

WARNING: In addition to the warnings listed below, follow all safety guidelines as described in the
Safety Manual. Failure to do so can result in severe personal injury.

Installation and Environment

Except for installations requiring certification by the manufacturer, see that a radiation protection survey is made by a qualified expert
in accordance with NCRP 102, section 7, as revised. Perform a survey after every change in equipment, workload, or operating
conditions which might significantly increase the probability of persons receiving more than the maximum permissible dose
equivalent.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Mechanical-electrical Warning

WARNING: Before initiating a movement of the patient table or gantry, ensure that the area is free of
obstructions such as tools, boxes, chairs, and step stools. Physical injury or damage can
occur.
All of the moveable assemblies and parts of this equipment should be operated with care and routinely inspected in accordance with
the manufacturer’s recommendations contained in the equipment manuals.

Only properly trained and qualified personnel should be permitted access to any internal parts. Live electrical terminals are deadly; be
sure line disconnects are opened and other appropriate precautions are taken before opening access doors, removing enclosure
panels, or attaching accessories.

Prior to any service and maintenance activities inside components:

• Switch off the system at the main power supply, and the uninterruptible power supply (UPS).
• Use lockout/tagout (LOTO) procedures to safeguard against the release of hazardous energy during installation,
maintenance or service work on the system.
• Always use an ESD protection wrist strap when servicing any component in the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 3

Electrical-grounding Instructions
The equipment must be grounded to an earth ground by a separate conductor. The neutral side of the line is not to be considered the
earth ground. On equipment provided with a line cord, the equipment must be connected to a properly grounded, three-pin
receptacle. Do not use a three-to-two pin adapter.

Diagnostic Imaging Systems - Radiation Warning

X-ray and Gamma-rays are dangerous to both operator and others in the vicinity unless established safe exposure procedures are
strictly observed.

Gamma radiation presents exposure risk to the operator and others in the vicinity of a radioactive source. Radiopharmaceutical-filled
phantoms present the greatest risk, while sealed sources present lesser risk. Exposure mitigation procedures described in the GSS NA
radiation safety documents can reduce this risk. Operators should use a combination of time, distance, and shielding techniques to
reduce the exposure to themselves and others from sealed sources and injected phantoms. Philips employees are obligated to comply
with the conditions in Philips GSS NA’s Radioactive Materials License, out of state license reciprocity agreements, and the customers’
radioactive materials licenses.

The useful and scattered beams can produce serious or fatal bodily injuries to any persons in the surrounding area if used by an
unskilled operator. Adequate precautions must always be taken to avoid exposure to the useful beam, as well as to leakage radiation
from within the source housing or to scattered radiation resulting from the passage of radiation through matter.

Those authorized to operate, participate in or supervise the operation of the equipment must be thoroughly familiar and comply
completely with the current established safe exposure factors and procedures described in publications, such as: Subchapter J of Title
21 of the Code of Federal Regulations, "Radiological Health", and the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement
(NCRP) no. 102, "Medical X-ray, Electron Beam and Gamma-Ray Protection for Energies Up To 50 MeV (Equipment Design,
Performance and Use (Supersedes NCRP Report No. 33) (1989)".

Those responsible for planning of x-ray and gamma-ray equipment installations must be thoroughly familiar and comply completely
with NCRP no. 49, "Structural Shielding Design and Evaluation for Medical Use of X rays and Gamma Rays of Energies Up to 10 MeV
(1976)". Failure to observe these warnings may cause serious or fatal bodily injuries to the operator or those in the area.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 4

Symbol Descriptions

Warning symbol Radiation warning symbol

Laser warning symbol Biohazard warning symbol

Magnetism warning symbol Projectile warning symbol

Electrical warning symbol Do not touch

Recycle Label
Dispose of in accordance with your country’s
requirements. This label indicates that there is
Crush warning symbol material in the system that you must separately
collect and recycle in accordance with the
requirements of the European Waste Electrical
Equipment (WEEE) Directive.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 5

Revision History

ECO # Revision Date Comments

E-054382 A March 2015 New Release

Updated the instruction of the section of Gantry Heavy Parts Repair &
E-056831 B May 2015
Replacement on page 296.

Added the figures and instructions of the following sections:

Column Covers on page 43;
Front Cover on page 44;
Rear Cover on page 52;
Transformer for DMS and DMS Heater(T201) on page 105
Switching Power Supply on page 111
E-064470 C November 2015 DMS FRU (Field Replacement Unit) Replacement on page 130
RCOM Replacement on page 133
Detector Module Replacement on page 158
DMS Heater and Fan Assembly Replacement on page 183
Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit on page 267
Assembling the Hanging Bracket for Tank on page 270
Assembling the DMS Heavy Parts Lifting Tool on page 273

Updated the Inverter Box information in the section Inverter Box on page 237;
Updated the figures of power control box in the section Power Control Box on
E-066752 D December 2015 page 242;
Added the instructions of silicone washers in the section of Unpacking the New
Tube on page 313.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 6

ECO # Revision Date Comments

Added the torque values in the following sections:

Installing the Z-Position Detection Board on page 79;
Installing the A-Plane Grid ASSY on page 84;
Installing the Monitor Board on page 88;
Installing the Monitor Detector on page 92;
Installing the Stepping Motor on page 96;
Installing the Transformer (T201) on page 107;
Installing the Transformer(T202) on page 110;
E-071305 E March 2017 Installing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203(Type A) on page 121;
Assembling the Hanging Bracket for Tank on page 270;
Assembling the DMS Heavy Parts Lifting Tool on page 273;
Added the section of Unpacking the New Tube on page 313;
Updated the Figure 3-21 on page 91;
Added the step of attaching the Tube Front Support Bracket Step 3 on page 316;
Updated the torque value in the section of Unpacking the New Tube on page
313;
Updated the document changes of the section of Removing the CT Tank Box on
page 323;

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 7

ECO # Revision Date Comments

Updated the following information related DMS:

Modified Table for Table 1-4 on page 27
Modified Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32
Modified RCOM Replacement on page 133
Modified figure Detector Module Slots Locations on page 159
Modified Removing the Detector Module on page 160
Added instructions for all FRU to calibrate and check according to the
Calibration manual and the Performance manual
Modified DMS Top Cover on page 212
E-071305 E March 2017 Added instructions to check and program FW of RCOM
Updated all FRUs inDMS FRU (Field Replacement Unit) Replacement on page
130
Added Replacing the Detector Module Cable on page 172, DMS Top Cover on
page 212 & DMS Front Cover Replacement on page 218
Removed request to perform Short Tube Conditioning from Performing
Calibration on page 157 for RCOM replacement.
Added packaging instructions for all DMS FRU (Field Replacement Unit)
Replacement on page 130.
Added Opening the New DMS Shipping Box on page 288;
Added Packaging the Old DMS on page 299

Modified This section shows how to replace GPC PCM-3362N and GPC PCM-
3365E-S3A1E. on page 413;
Deleted Note: GPC Power supply cable is shipped with GPC Assy (PCM-
3362N) on page 348;
E-089502 F June 2017 Added the section of Replacing GPC PCM-3362N with GPC PCM-3365E-
S3A1E on page 420;
Added the section of Firmware on page 431;
Added the section of Replacing GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E with GPC PCM-
3365E-S3A1E on page 432

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 8

ECO # Revision Date Comments

Updated Figure 3-63 on page 138;

Updated Figure 3-67 on page 142;
Updated Figure 3-72 on page 145;
Updated Figure 3-80 on page 151
E-090939 G July 2017
Updated Figure 3-115 on page 187;
Updated Figure 3-129 on page 204;
Updated Figure 3-142 on page 221;
Updated Figure 4-17 on page 278

Added the section of Mobile Control Panel on page 61;

Deleted procedures of perform the Calibration in the Installing the Gantry
Rotor Laser Marker Assembly on page 228;
Modified the required tools in the following sections:
Z-Position Detection Board on page 75;
A-Plane Grid ASSY on page 80;
E-091424 H July 2017
Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly on page 227;
Inverter Box on page 237;
Power Control Box on page 242;
Preparing to Replace Gantry Heavy FRUs on page 265;
X-ray Tube on page 304;
CT Tank Box on page 321;

Update two figures of Figure 3-67 and Figure 3-80;

Add Step 2; Step 3 and Step 23 in the section of Installing the New RCOM on
page 141;
E-097619 I December 2017 Added a note of Once the optional mounting position is used, it will conflict
with Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit at the same side, FSE should be
aware of this issue. on page 273;
Added the section of Final Steps Before System Handover on page 472;

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 9

ECO # Revision Date Comments

Add the sections of 3.11.4 Replacing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B)

with G203 (Type B) on page 122 and Installing Switching Power Supply
G203(Type B) on page 127 .
Added the section of 3.28 Fuses on page 259;
Add the Step 8 on page 387;
Add the sections of 6.1.4 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B with
Type B on page 395 and Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B on
E-104543 J August 2018 page 399 .
Added the section of Gantry Interlock Switch on page 446.
Add the sections of 3.11.5 Replacing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A)
with G203 (Type B) on page 128 and 6.1.5 Replacing Switching Power Supply
G101 Type A with Type B on page 400.
Updated the Figure 6-49 and Figure 4.
AddedNote: on page 127 and Note: on page 399.

Added Step 18 on page 344;

Added Step 6 on page 351;
E-114089 K April 2019 Added Step 2 on page 383;
Updated Steps in the section of3.6.4 Installing the Stepping Motor Driver on
page 99.

Added Note: on page 38;

E-115514 L May 2019 Updated 6.8 Gantry Interlock Switch on page 446;
Added 7.6 Gantry Interlock Switch on page 471.

Updated 3.11 Switching Power Supply on page 111;

E-120467 M October 2019
Updated 6.1 Switching Power Supply (G101 or G102) on page 388.

AddedNote: on page 122;

E-125591 N April 2020
AddedNote: on page 128.

E-127439 O June 2020 Administrative Change: updated Figure 5-50 on page 378.

E-129876 P September 2020 Updated the section of Installing the Stepping Motor on page 96.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 10

ECO # Revision Date Comments

Updated the section of Column Covers on page 44;

E-130649 Q October 2020 Added the section of Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter on page 520;
Added the section of Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter on page 534.

E-131076 R November 2020 Administrative Change: update Table 3-28 on page 266.

Updated the section of Stepping Motor Driver on page 114;

CN302336 S June 2021
Updated the section of Gantry Interlock Switch on page 497.

CN333449 T October 2021 Added the section of Collimator Ball-Screw on page 88.

CN419383 U March 2022 Updated the section of Installing the X-ray Tube on page 347.

CN451131 V June 2022 Updated the section of Main Rotation Frequency Converter on page 254.

Added Step 27 on page 354 to Step 28 on page 354 in the section of Installing the
CN465619 W August 2022
X-ray Tube on page 347.

CN490059 X September 2022 Updated the section of Gantry Interface Board on page 489.

CN565690 Y February 2023 Updated the section of Breathing Navigation Board on page 417.

This document was prepared by CT/AMI Service Innovations.

For any additions, corrections, or suggestions, contact your next level of support.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 11

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Contents
Section 1: Introduction: ................................................................................... 24
1.1 Overview..................................................................................................................24
1.2 Prerequisite ..............................................................................................................25
1.2.1 Required Tools.................................................................................................25
1.2.2 Torques Values for Screw Connection..................................................................25
1.3 Safety......................................................................................................................28
1.3.1 Precautionary Measures Regarding Electrical Voltage ............................................28
1.3.2 ESD—Anti-Static Field Service Kit .......................................................................29
1.3.3 ESD Protection Procedure..................................................................................30
1.4 Preparing to Repair or Replace the Gantry FRUs.............................................................34
1.4.1 Powering Off the System...................................................................................34
1.4.2 Locking the Rotor.............................................................................................35
1.4.3 Gantry Interlock Switch ....................................................................................37
1.4.4 Auxiliary Control Assembly (Rotation Control) ......................................................38
1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures.........................................................39
1.6 Performing Backup ....................................................................................................41

Section 2: Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement: ............................................... 42

2.1 Gantry Covers Replacement Dolly ................................................................................43
2.2 Column Covers..........................................................................................................44
2.2.1 Removing the Column Covers ............................................................................44
2.2.2 Installing the Column Covers .............................................................................46
2.3 Front Cover ..............................................................................................................47
2.3.1 Removing the Front Cover.................................................................................47
2.3.2 Installing the Front Cover..................................................................................54
2.4 Rear Cover ...............................................................................................................55

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 12

2.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover..................................................................................55

2.4.2 Installing the Rear Cover...................................................................................59
2.5 Top Cover ................................................................................................................60
2.5.1 Removing the Top Cover ...................................................................................60
2.5.2 Installing the Top Cover ....................................................................................61
2.6 Slip Ring Cover .........................................................................................................62
2.6.1 Removing the Slip Ring Cover ............................................................................62
2.6.2 Installing the Slip Ring Cover.............................................................................63
2.7 Mobile Control Panel ..................................................................................................64
2.7.1 Required Tools.................................................................................................64
2.7.2 Estimated Time................................................................................................65
2.7.3 Installing the Mobile Control Panel......................................................................65
2.7.4 Removing the Mobile Control Panel.....................................................................71

Section 3: Gantry Front FRUs: ........................................................................... 76

3.1 Z-Position Detection Board .........................................................................................78
3.1.1 Required Tools.................................................................................................78
3.1.2 Estimated Time................................................................................................78
3.1.3 Removing the Z-Position Board ..........................................................................79
3.1.4 Installing the Z-Position Detection Board .............................................................82
3.2 A-Plane Grid ASSY .....................................................................................................83
3.2.1 Required Tools.................................................................................................83
3.2.2 Estimated Time................................................................................................83
3.2.3 Removing the A-Plane Grid ASSY .......................................................................84
3.2.4 Installing the A-Plane Grid ASSY ........................................................................87
3.3 Collimator Ball-Screw.................................................................................................88
3.3.1 Required Tools.................................................................................................88
3.3.2 Estimated Time................................................................................................88
3.3.3 Removing the Collimator Ball-Screw ...................................................................88

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 13

3.3.4 Installing the Collimator Ball-Screw .................................................................. 100

3.4 Monitor Board ......................................................................................................... 102
3.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 102
3.4.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 102
3.4.3 Removing the Monitor Board............................................................................ 103
3.4.4 Installing the Monitor Board ............................................................................ 105
3.5 Monitor Detector ..................................................................................................... 106
3.5.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 106
3.5.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 106
3.5.3 Removing the Monitor Detector ........................................................................ 107
3.5.4 Installing the Monitor Detector......................................................................... 109
3.6 Stepping Motor ....................................................................................................... 110
3.6.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 110
3.6.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 110
3.6.3 Removing the Stepping Motor .......................................................................... 111
3.6.4 Installing the Stepping Motor ........................................................................... 113
3.7 Stepping Motor Driver .............................................................................................. 114
3.7.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 116
3.7.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 117
3.7.3 Removing the Stepping Motor Driver ................................................................ 117
3.7.4 Installing the Stepping Motor Driver ................................................................. 120
3.8 Left Gantry Panel .................................................................................................... 124
3.8.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 124
3.8.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 124
3.8.3 Removing the Left Gantry Panel ....................................................................... 125
3.8.4 Installing the Left Gantry Panel ........................................................................ 125
3.9 Right Gantry Panel .................................................................................................. 126
3.9.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 126
3.9.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 126

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 14

3.9.3 Removing the Right Gantry Panel ..................................................................... 127

3.9.4 Installing the Right Gantry Panel ...................................................................... 127
3.10 Transformer for DMS and DMS Heater(T201)............................................................. 128
3.10.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 128
3.10.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 129
3.10.3 Removing the Transformer (T201) .................................................................. 129
3.10.4 Installing the Transformer (T201) ................................................................... 130
3.11 Transformer for Rotor Control Board and Collimator System(T202)............................... 131
3.11.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 131
3.11.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 132
3.11.3 Removing the Transformer (T202) .................................................................. 132
3.11.4 Installing the Transformer(T202).................................................................... 133
3.12 Switching Power Supply.......................................................................................... 134
3.12.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 139
3.12.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 140
3.12.3 Replacing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203 (Type A) .......................... 141
3.12.4 Replacing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) with G203 (Type B).................. 145
3.12.5 Replacing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A) with G203 (Type B)................. 151
3.13 DMS FRU (Field Replacement Unit) Replacement ........................................................ 153
3.13.1 DMS FRU Replacement Overview .................................................................... 153
3.13.2 DMS FRU Replacement Preparation ................................................................. 154
3.14 RCOM Replacement................................................................................................ 156
3.14.1 Removing the RCOM ..................................................................................... 156
3.14.2 Installing the New RCOM ............................................................................... 164
3.15 Detector Module Replacement ................................................................................. 181
3.15.1 Identifying the Detector Module Class ............................................................. 181
3.15.2 Removing the Detector Module....................................................................... 183
3.15.3 Installing the New Detector Module................................................................. 187
3.16 Replacing the Detector Module Cable ........................................................................ 195

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 15

3.16.1 Removing the Detector Module Cable .............................................................. 195

3.16.2 Installing the Detector Module Cable ............................................................... 199
3.17 DMS Heater and Fan Assembly Replacement ............................................................. 206
3.17.1 Removing the DMS Heater and Fan Assembly................................................... 206
3.17.2 Installing the DMS Heater and Fan Assembly.................................................... 212
3.18 DMS Fan Assembly Replacement ............................................................................. 224
3.18.1 Removing the DMS Fan Assembly ................................................................... 224
3.18.2 Installing the DMS Fan Assembly .................................................................... 228
3.19 DMS Top Cover ..................................................................................................... 235
3.19.1 Removing the DMS Top Cover ........................................................................ 235
3.19.2 Installing the DMS Top Cover ......................................................................... 238
3.20 DMS Front Cover Replacement ................................................................................ 241
3.20.1 Removing the DMS Front Cover...................................................................... 241
3.20.2 Installing the DMS Front Cover....................................................................... 243
3.21 Rotor Control Board ............................................................................................... 247
3.21.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 247
3.21.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 248
3.21.3 Removing the Rotor Control Board.................................................................. 248
3.21.4 Installing the Rotor Control Board................................................................... 249
3.22 Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly ........................................................................ 250
3.22.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 250
3.22.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 251
3.22.3 Removing the Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly .......................................... 251
3.22.4 Installing the Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly ........................................... 251
3.23 Temperature Sensor Board ..................................................................................... 252
3.23.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 252
3.23.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 252
3.23.3 Removing the Temperature Sensor/Rotation Zero Position Board ........................ 253
3.23.4 Installing the Temperature Sensor Board ......................................................... 253

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 16

3.24 Main Rotation Frequency Converter .......................................................................... 254

3.24.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 255
3.24.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 256
3.24.3 Removing the Main Rotation Frequency Converter ............................................ 256
3.24.4 Installing the Main Rotation Frequency Converter ............................................. 257
3.25 Rotation Driver Power Supply Transformer ................................................................ 258
3.25.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 258
3.25.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 258
3.25.3 Removing the Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer ................................... 259
3.25.4 Installing the Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer .................................... 260
3.26 Inverter Box ......................................................................................................... 261
3.26.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 262
3.26.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 262
3.26.3 Removing the Inverter Box ............................................................................ 262
3.26.4 Installing the Inverter Box ............................................................................. 265
3.27 Power Control Box ................................................................................................. 266
3.27.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 266
3.27.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 266
3.27.3 Removing the Power Control Box.................................................................... 267
3.27.4 Installing the Power Control Box..................................................................... 269
3.28 Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor ............................................................... 270
3.28.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 270
3.28.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 272
3.28.3 Removing The Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor ................................. 272
3.28.4 Installing the Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor ................................... 282
3.29 Fuses ................................................................................................................... 283
3.29.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 283
3.29.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 283
3.29.3 Removing the Fuses in the Power Control Box .................................................. 284

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 17

3.29.4 Installing the Fuses in the Power Control Box ................................................... 289
3.30 Top Cover Fan....................................................................................................... 289
3.30.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 291
3.30.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 292
3.30.3 Removing the Top Cover Fan ......................................................................... 292
3.30.4 Installing the Top Cover Fan .......................................................................... 295

Section 4: Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement: ...................................... 296

4.1 Preparing to Replace Gantry Heavy FRUs .................................................................... 297
4.1.1 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 298
4.1.2 Required Tools............................................................................................... 298
4.1.3 Special Required Tools .................................................................................... 298
4.1.4 Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit .......................................................... 299
4.2 DMS Replacement ................................................................................................... 303
4.2.1 Preparing the Gantry For DMS Replacement....................................................... 303
4.2.2 Completing the DMS Installation ...................................................................... 335
4.3 X-ray Tube ............................................................................................................. 336
4.3.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 337
4.3.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 337
4.3.3 Removing the X-ray Tube................................................................................ 338
4.3.4 Unpacking the New Tube................................................................................. 345
4.3.5 Installing the X-ray Tube................................................................................. 347
4.4 CT Tank Box ........................................................................................................... 355
4.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 357
4.4.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 357
4.4.3 Removing the CT Tank Box.............................................................................. 358
4.4.4 Installing the CT Tank Box............................................................................... 361
4.4.5 Installing the New DMS ASSY .......................................................................... 362

Section 5: Gantry Rear FRUs: ........................................................................... 363

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 18

5.1 Slip Ring Plate......................................................................................................... 364

5.1.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 365
5.1.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 365
5.1.3 Removing the Slip Ring Plate ........................................................................... 365
5.1.4 Installing the new Slip Ring Plate ..................................................................... 372
5.2 Gantry Rotation Belt ................................................................................................ 380
5.2.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 380
5.2.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 381
5.2.3 Removing the Gantry Rotation Belt................................................................... 381
5.2.4 Installing the Gantry Rotation Belt.................................................................... 386
5.3 Gantry Stator Receiver (1.1Gbit/s) ............................................................................ 387
5.3.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 387
5.3.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 388
5.3.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Receiver ............................................................... 388
5.3.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly .................................................. 392
5.4 Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB ..................................................................... 393
5.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 393
5.4.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 393
5.4.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB ........................................ 394
5.4.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB ......................................... 397
5.5 Gantry Stator Transceiver......................................................................................... 399
5.5.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 399
5.5.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 399
5.5.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Transceiver ........................................................... 399
5.5.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Transceiver ............................................................ 401
5.6 Rotor Data Transmitter ............................................................................................ 401
5.6.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 402
5.6.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 402
5.6.3 Removing the Rotor Data Transmitter ............................................................... 402

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 19

5.6.4 Installing the Rotor Data Transmitter ................................................................ 404

5.7 Rotor Transceiver Board ........................................................................................... 404
5.7.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 404
5.7.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 405
5.7.3 Removing the Rotor Transceiver Board.............................................................. 405
5.7.4 Installing the Rotor Transceiver Board .............................................................. 407
5.8 Power Brush Block Assembly..................................................................................... 407
5.8.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 407
5.8.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 408
5.8.3 Removing the Power Brush Block Assembly ....................................................... 408
5.8.4 Installing the Power Brush Block Assembly ........................................................ 410
5.9 Stationary Encoder Unit............................................................................................ 412
5.9.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 412
5.9.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 412
5.9.3 Removing the Stationary Encoder Unit .............................................................. 413
5.9.4 Installing the Stationary Encoder Unit ............................................................... 414
5.10 Rotating Encoder Unit ............................................................................................ 414
5.10.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 414
5.10.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 415
5.10.3 Removing the Rotating Encoder Unit ............................................................... 415
5.10.4 Installing the Rotating Encoder Unit ................................................................ 416
5.11 Breathing Navigation Board..................................................................................... 417
5.11.1 Required Tools ............................................................................................. 419
5.11.2 Estimated Time ............................................................................................ 419
5.11.3 Replacing Breathing Navigation Board Type A with Type A ................................. 420
5.11.4 Replacing Breathing Navigation Board Type A with Type B ................................. 423
5.11.5 Replacing Breathing Navigation Board Type B with Type B ................................. 427

Section 6: Gantry Left Column FRUs: ................................................................ 429

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 20

6.1 Switching Power Supply (G101 or G102) .................................................................... 431

6.1.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 433
6.1.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 433
6.1.3 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A with Type A................................ 435
6.1.4 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B with Type B................................ 441
6.1.5 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A with Type B................................ 447
6.1.6 Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type A................................ 447
6.1.7 Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type B................................ 451
6.1.8 Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B with Type B................................ 453
6.2 Switching Power Supply Isolation Transformer............................................................. 454
6.2.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 454
6.2.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 455
6.2.3 Removing the Power Supply Switch Isolation Transformer ................................... 455
6.2.4 Installing the Power Supply Switch Isolation Transformer .................................... 455
6.3 G-Host ASSY........................................................................................................... 456
6.3.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 456
6.3.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 457
6.3.3 Removing the G-Host ASSY ............................................................................. 457
6.3.4 Installing the G-Host Assembly ........................................................................ 458
6.4 GPC Assembly......................................................................................................... 459
6.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 459
6.4.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 459
6.4.3 GPC Replacement........................................................................................... 460
6.5 Stator Control Board ................................................................................................ 487
6.5.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 488
6.5.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 488
6.5.3 Removing the Stator Control Board .................................................................. 488
6.5.4 Installing the Stator Control Board ................................................................... 488
6.6 Gantry Interface Board............................................................................................. 489

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 21

6.6.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 490

6.6.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 490
6.6.3 Replacing Gantry Interface Board Type A with Type A ......................................... 490
6.6.4 Replacing Gantry Interface Board Type A with Type B ......................................... 491
6.6.5 Replacing Gantry Interface Board Type B with Type B ......................................... 494
6.7 Manual Operation Panel ASSY ................................................................................... 495
6.7.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 495
6.7.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 495
6.7.3 Removing the Manual Operation Panel .............................................................. 496
6.7.4 Installing the Manual Operation Panel ............................................................... 496
6.8 Gantry Interlock Switch............................................................................................ 497
6.8.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 499
6.8.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 500
6.8.3 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A with Type B ................................ 501
6.8.4 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A with Type C ................................ 513
6.8.5 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B with Type B ................................ 517
6.8.6 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B with Type C ................................ 518
6.8.7 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C with Type C ................................ 518
6.9 Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter ....................................................................... 520
6.9.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 520
6.9.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 521
6.9.3 Removing the Gantry Side Cover Filter.............................................................. 521
6.9.4 Installing the Gantry Side Cover Filter............................................................... 522

Section 7: Gantry Right Column FRUs: .............................................................. 523

7.1 Surge Suppressor .................................................................................................... 524
7.1.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 525
7.1.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 525
7.1.3 Removing the Surge Suppressor ...................................................................... 525
7.1.4 Installing the Surge Suppressor ....................................................................... 526

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 22

7.2 AC Contactor (KM101, KM102,KM104) ....................................................................... 526

7.2.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 526
7.2.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 526
7.2.3 Removing the Three Phase AC Contactor ........................................................... 526
7.2.4 Installing the Three Phase AC Contactor ............................................................ 527
7.3 Circuit Breaker ........................................................................................................ 528
7.3.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 528
7.3.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 528
7.3.3 Removing the Circuit Breaker .......................................................................... 529
7.3.4 Installing the Circuit Breaker ........................................................................... 529
7.4 Terminal Block Assy (RCT4F) .................................................................................... 530
7.4.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 530
7.4.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 530
7.4.3 Removing the Terminal Block Assy ................................................................... 531
7.4.4 Installing the Terminal Block Assy .................................................................... 531
7.5 Power Control Board ................................................................................................ 531
7.5.1 Required Tools............................................................................................... 531
7.5.2 Estimated Time.............................................................................................. 532
7.5.3 Removing the Power Control Board................................................................... 532
7.5.4 Installing the Power Control Board.................................................................... 533
7.6 Gantry Interlock Switch............................................................................................ 533
7.7 Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter ....................................................................... 534

Section 8: Final Steps Before System Handover: ............................................... 535

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 23

1.1 Overview
This manual describes the repair and replacement procedures for the Gantry of Access CT Scanner
System.
It is divided into the following sections according to the components location:
• Overview on page 24
• Prerequisite on page 25
• Safety on page 28
• Preparing to Repair or Replace the Gantry FRUs on page 34
• Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39
• Performing Backup on page 41
• Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement on page 42
• Gantry Front FRUs on page 76
• Gantry Rear FRUs on page 328
• Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement on page 296
• Gantry Left Column FRUs on page 429
• Gantry Right Column FRUs on page 523

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 24

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.2 Prerequisite
1.2.1 Required Tools
• ESD Anti-Static kit
• Standard Service Tools
• Torque Wrench
• DMS Allen Wrench (for removing the DMS)
• Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tools Kit (P/N 4598 008 02701) only for removing the Heavy Parts
• Loctite 243

Note: Special tools necessary for a specific procedure are listed in the same procedure.

1.2.2 Torques Values for Screw Connection

Table 1-1 on page 25 shows special nominal tightening torques in Nm and lb.-ft. and wrench sizes in mm
for screws and nuts with metric threads used on units.
Table 1-2 on page 26 shows Hexagon screws tightening torques in Nm and lb.-ft. and wrench sizes in mm
for screws and nuts with metric threads used on units.
Table 1-3 on page 27 shows nominal tightening torques in Nm and lb.-ft. and wrench sizes in mm for
screws and nuts with metric threads used on units.
Table 1-4 on page 27 shows specific DMS tightening torques in Nm and lb.-ft. and wrench sizes in mm for
screws and nuts with metric threads used on units.
Table 1-1: Special screws
Torque
Nominal Thread Diameter Allen Key
Nm lb-ft
Rotation bearing M8 24Nm 19.2
Rotation bearing M10 46Nm 33.9
Fastness Screw of Slip Ring M6 6Nm 10.3

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 25

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

Table 1-1: Special screws

Torque
Nominal Thread Diameter Allen Key
Nm lb-ft
4 hexagon screws on Bracing Component
6 18Nm—the intensity grade is 8.8 13.2
of Cradle (M8X30)
4 hexagon screws on Bracket Wheel
6 18Nm—the intensity grade is 8.8 13.2
Component of Cradle (M8X25)
4 hexagon screws on Brace-base of a clinic
transmission system of patient table 6 18Nm—the intensity grade is 8.8 13.2
(M8X25)
Fastness Screw of Slip Ring M8 6 12Nm 8.9

Table 1-2: Hexagon Socket Head Screw

Torque
Nominal Thread Diameter Allen Key
Nm lb-ft
M3 2.5 1Nm 0.7
M4 3 3Nm 2.2
M5 4 5Nm 3.6
M6 5 8Nm 5.9
M8 6 20Nm 14.7
M10 8 40Nm 29.4
M12 10 70Nm 51.6
M16 (steel) 14 120Nm 88.5

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 26

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

Table 1-3: Normal screws

Wrench and Torque

Nominal Thread Diameter
Screw driver Nm lb-ft
M3 0.7Nm 0.52
M4 1.6Nm 1.18
M5 3.5Nm 2.58
M6 7.5Nm 5.5
M8 18Nm 13.2
M10 37Nm 27.3
M12 63Nm 46.4
M16 (steel) 12 120Nm 88.5
M20 (steel) 150Nm 110

Table 1-4: Special Screws and Torques for DMS

No. Description Qty Tool Type of fastening Torque

1 DMS cover to cradle 13 Bit # 3 mm Captive SCREW M4x23 100 Ncm

2 RCOM assy to cradle 15 Bit # 2.5 mm Screw CAPTIVE M3x12 80 Ncm

3 Fan Housing through heater to inlet 4 Bit # 3 mm SCR CAP M4x70 150 Ncm

4 Top cover to cradle 12 Bit # 2 mm Socket button head screw M3x10 80 Ncm

5 DMS grounding 1 Key size=10 SCR-HEX M6X10 4 Nm

6 Fan to fan housing 4 Bit # 3 mm SCR M4X45 80 Ncm

7 Module Assy to cradle 18 Bit # 4 mm SCR M5X20 4Nm

8 DMS to rotor 4 Bit # 8 mm Self lock PL screw M10x50 55Nm

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 27

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.3 Safety
The safety precautions and procedures described in this section ensures the safety of all personnel during
servicing and operation of the Gantry. For more information, refer to the Safety Guidelines Manual.
1.3.1 Precautionary Measures Regarding Electrical Voltage
Before starting the procedures in this manual read and understand the warnings listed below.

WARNING: Prior to any service and maintenance activities inside components:

• Switch OFF the system at the main power supply, (using the on-site ON-OFF switch) and
the internal/external Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
• Make sure that no other person can switch ON power or switch OFF the security
measures, when installation, maintenance or service work on the system is performed.
• Assign an additional person to monitor safety issues during the entire replacement
process

!
WARNING: In addition to the warnings listed above, make sure to follow all safety guidelines as
described in the safety guidelines manual. Failure to do so can result in severe personal
injury.

WARNING: Ensure that all cables which were released when replacing parts, are secured with tie wraps
to their original position.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 28

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.3.2 ESD—Anti-Static Field Service Kit

This section describes the use of the ESD—Anti-Static Field Service Kit with Access CT Scanner System.
The field service kit is designed to connect a field service engineer and the static-dissipative work mat to
the same ground point. The wrist strap and the dissipative mat drains any static charges from the body
and from any conductive objects placed on the mat, and prevents the generation of any new static
charges.

The ESD—Anti-Static Kit (see Figure 1-1

on page 29) contains the following:
• Static-dissipative work mat, with Work
pockets for storing kit components Mat
Ground cord assembly Wrist
• Coiled cord
Strap

• Black cord
• Blacksnap
Coiled
• Banana Plug Alligator Cord
• Alligator clip Clip
• Adjustable wrist strap Banana
Plug
Black Black
Cord Snap

Figure 1-1: ESD Anti-static Kit Parts

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 29

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.3.3 ESD Protection Procedure

!
WARNING: Electrical Hazard! Before working on electrical parts in the Gantry Rotor, ensure that the
ground cable is connected to the Rotor and Stator. To prevent an electric shock, follow the
procedure below.

Checking the GND to the Rotor or Stator

The Rotor bearing is made from non-conductive material. Therefore, it is required to connect the Rotor to
a good ground prior to performing any service procedure on the Rotor.

Note: The stator contains two ground points. Use one for the ground cable connection to the Rotor, and the
other to connect the ESD Field Service Kit.

Figure 1-2: Gantry Rotor GND Figure 1-3: Gantry Stator GND

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 30

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

Checking the GND to the Fix Patient Table

ESD GND

Figure 1-4: Patient Table GND

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 31

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

Connecting the GND to the Vertical Moveable Couch

Note: There are two ground connections to the Vertical Moveable Couch; one is used for the Ground Cable
connection. Use the other to connect the ESD Field Service Kit (see Figure 1-5 below).

ESD GND

Figure 1-5: Vertical Moveable Couch GND

Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit

1. Unfold the work mat on the Patient Table and remove the kit contents from the mat pockets.
2. Snap the ground cord assembly to the work mat by means of the large black snap.
3. Fit on the elastic wrist strap snugly, yet comfortably.
4. Connect the coiled cord of the ground cord assembly to the wrist strap by means of the small plastic
snap.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 32

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

5. Connect the black cord of the ground cord assembly to the stator ground point by the banana plug.
The field service engineer is now static-protected, and can safely handle static-sensitive boards and
components.

!
CAUTION: Set any component on the grounded mat only.
Transport replacement PC boards in static-shielding bags or containers. Place any faulty boards removed
from the equipment in static-shielding packaging so that additional damage is not done during shipment
to the repair depot.

!
CAUTION: The grounding procedures detailed above effectively remove static from conductive objects
like the human body or metal parts. However, non-conductive objects (such as synthetic
clothing, plastic coffee cups, cigarette packs, vinyl work order envelopes, or common
plastics) can also carry large amounts of static charge, and the charges on nonconductors
such as these cannot be removed by grounding. Therefore, the engineer must take care to
keep all such nonconductors as far from the work area and the sensitive equipment as
possible.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 33

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.4 Preparing to Repair or Replace the Gantry FRUs

1.4.1 Powering Off the System
1. Press the Patient Table Out button on Control Panel
to move the Patient Table to maximum Out and for
the vertical moveable couch to Lowest position.
2. Turn Off the system:
a. Log Off the console application and shut down
the console computer.
b. Turn Off the Gantry from the On/Off Switch on
the right column (see Figure 1-6).
c. Turn Off the Isolation Transformer.
d. Turn Off the Wall Power Box.

Figure 1-6: Main Power Switch

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 34

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.4.2 Locking the Rotor

If you intend to remove a unit,follow these precautions to prevent mechanical hazards:
1. Bring the Rotor to the position in which the unit
can be removed.
2. Pull out the Roto Locking pin and turn it 90
degrees so that it rests in the groove.
3. Slowly turn the Rotor clockwise, when the Rotor
is in the correct position, the locking pin locks in
to place(see Figure 1-7).

!
WARNING: Make sure the Stem Screw is
close to the pedestal of Locking
Pin.
4. After the locking pin is en-gaged ensure that the
gantry cannot be rotated.
5. Do not release the Rotor Locking Pin until the unit Figure 1-7: Locking Pin In - Engaged
(or its replacement) is returned and fixed securely
to the Rotor.
6. In its idle state, the system rotates most of the
time; consider all units mounted on the Rotor as
f l yi ngunits. If you fail to fasten units to the Rotor
securely or leave loose screws, units may detach
from the Rotor and cause serious injury. After
servicing any unit, verify that all units and screws
are at t ac he d sec urel yi nt hei r c orrect pl aces.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 35

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

!
WARNING: When Replacing Gantry Components Position the Rotor As Instructed and lock the rotor
Figure 1-7 on page 35

!
WARNING: To disengage the Rotor Locking Pin (see Figure 1-8), pull out the Locking Pin and turn it 90o.
Make sure the Screw Stem is inside the slot (see Figure 1-8).

3
1 2

Figure 1-8: Locking Pin Out - Disengaged

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 36

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.4.3 Gantry Interlock Switch

Note: When Gantry Column Cover is open and the Gantry is Power ON, the gantry could be rotate only while
the Gantry Interlock Switch (on Gantry left and right side) is Pulled out (see Figure 1-9).

Figure 1-9: Gantry Interlock Switch on right side Pulled Out

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 37

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.4.4 Auxiliary Control Assembly (Rotation Control)

WARNING: When manual control is needed, use the Auxiliary Control Assembly on Gantry Left side to
manually rotation the Gantry.

Movement commands are issued directly to the

implemented components via Auxiliary Control
Assembly by setting the Manual/Auto switch to
MANUAL mode (in maintenance conditions).
Manual/Auto
Commands from the Workstation will only be Select
executed when the Manual/Auto switch is set to
AUTO.
In MANUAL mode, the rotating can be done via
Auxiliary Control Assembly:
Note: The manual Rotation Speed knob will allow
manual speed control of the rotor. Turning the Rotation Speed
knob counterclockwise will slow down the
rotation speed to 0 rpm while a clockwise
adjustment will increase the speed. Rotation
of the rotor is in clockwise direction only.
Figure 1-10: Auxiliary Control Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 38

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement

Procedures
After completing any FRU replacement procedure, proceed as following:
1. Make sure that no materials or tools are left on the Gantry.
2. Release the Rotor Locking Pin and manually rotate the Rotor to verify smooth movement and that all
parts and cables are fixed properly and are not damaged or caught during rotation.
3. Install the Covers. Refer to the Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement on page 42.

Note: Ensure the Column Covers are installed tightly with Gantry Covers, without any movement.
4. Power ON the Wall Power Box.
5. Turn the Isolation Transformer ON.
6. Turn the Gantry ON from the ON/OFF switch on the Right Column.
7. Turn ON the Host Computer.
8. After the Windows 7 starts up, double-click the Access CT Host icon, and login as philips_service.
9. When replacing the programmable board update the firmware according the Access CT System
Programming Instructions Manual. The firmware update is available on the Host.
10. Run Calibration and Performance Test for the specific FRU replaced according the Access CT
Calibration and Adjustment Manual and Access CT Performance Manual.
11. Perform a few scans and verify image quality.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 39

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

12. Click service-FRU tracking, fill the FRU Tracking list after spare parts replacement complete.

Figure 1-11: FRU Tracking List

13. Complete procedure 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 40

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Introduction

1.6 Performing Backup

Perform Backup as following:
1. Log Off the application software from the Home page.
2. Insert your IST dongle, type in the IST password.
3. Double-click the Backup & Restore icon.
4. Log On as philips_service.
The Service Backup dialog opens (see Figure 1-12)
5. Select the Backup tab.
6. In the Backup Mode area, insert a blank CD/DVD and
select CD/DVD.
7. Click Select All and then click Backup.
Note: Select All must be selected, otherwise an error will occur
while restoring the database.
Note: Make sure the folder name do not include any space.
8. Click Yes to start.
9. When the backup is complete, click OK.
10. Click Exit to close the Backup & Restore dialog box.
11. Open the backup CD, and check the files.
12. Eject the CD.

Figure 1-12: Backup

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 41

Left and right references are from the point of view of a person standing at the end of the Patient Table,
facing the Gantry (see Figure 2-1).
.

Gantry

Left Right

Patient Table
Person

Figure 2-1:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 42

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.1 Gantry Covers Replacement Dolly

The following shows the detailed information about Gantry Covers Replacement Dolly.

Note: The dolly is just for front and rear covers replacement.

upper
adjusting
upper
securing Handle

lower lower
securing bolt adjusting

Figure 2-2: Gantry Covers Replacement Dolly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 43

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.2 Column Covers

This procedure explains how to remove and install the Column Covers.

2.2.1 Removing the Column Covers

Note: There are two types of Column Covers: Type A is without Gantry Side Cover Filter, Type B is with
Gantry Side Cover Filter, see Figure 2-3 on page 45; either right or left column cover of Type A is needed to
be replaced with Type B, replace the both with Type B together, replacement procedure of the two types
are the same; meanwhile replace the two Top Cover Fans with the new type: A2259-HBL TC.GN, refer to
Top Cover Fan on page 289.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 44

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Figure 2-3: Column Covers

Type B
Type A Column Cover
Column Cover

1. Power Off the system. Refer to Powering Off the System on page 34.
2. Release the 2 screws secure the column cover to the Gantry on both sides.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 45

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

3. Lift up the puller on the column cover to remove the cover on both sides.
Figure 2-4: Release the 2 screws on the column cover Figure 2-5: Lift up and remove the column

Column covers

4. Put the covers in a safe place.

2.2.2 Installing the Column Covers

1. Position the Column Cover.

Note: Make sure that all cables do not touch the Column Cover.
2. Attach the Column Cover with the 2 screws.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 46

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

3. Cover the screw holes with the decorative caps.

4. Power On the system, refer to Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

2.3 Front Cover

2.3.1 Removing the Front Cover
This procedure explains how to remove and install the Front Cover.

Removing the Column Covers

Performing 2.2.1 Removing the Column Covers on page 44 firstly.

Removing The Couch Base Front Cover (for fixed patient

table)
1. Remove 4 screws that attached Couch Base Front Cover on the left and right side(see Figure 2-6).
2. Remove the Couch Base Front Cover(see Figure 2-7).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 47

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Figure 2-6: Couch Base Front Cover Figure 2-7: Removing Four Screws

Removing The Bridge Component (for vertical moveable

couch)
1. Remove the Front Cover with the two screws.
2. Remove 1 screw that attached Bridge Components on the center of surface(see Figure 2-6).
3. Remove the Front Cover.
4. Remove the Bridge Component (see Figure 2-7).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 48

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Front Cover

Figure 2-8:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 49

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Removing the Front Cover

Remove the Front Cover as following:
1. Remove the Mylar(see Figure 2-9).
2. Place it aside on a safe surface.

Mylar

Figure 2-9: Remove the Mylar

3. Disconnect the following cables(see Figure 2-10 below) and (see Figure 2-11 below):
a. Right Emergency Stop LED Power Cable and Right Emergency Stop Switch Cable on the Right
Control Panel.
b. Left Emergency Stop Switch Cable and Left Emergency Stop LED Power Cable on the Left Control
Panel.
c. Main Control Board Cable on the Left Control Panel.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 50

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Figure 2-10: Cables Connected To The Front Figure 2-11: Cables Connected To The Front
Cover On The Right Side Cover On The Left Side

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 51

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

4. Attach the securing bolts on both upper and lower of the Cover Replacement Dolly to Gantry on
one side see Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14.
5. Adjust the 2 adjusting bolts on upper and lower respectively, ensure that the two wheels are on the
ground well see Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14.

Upper Securing Bolt

Lower Securing Bolt

Figure 2-12: Attach the Securing bolts

6. Detach the Gantry Frame Bolts that securing the Gantry front cover to the Gantry Frame (see
Figure 2-13 and Figure 2-14).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 52

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Figure 2-13: Release Screw1 Figure 2-14: Release Screw2

7. Remove the Front Cover.

8. Release the upper and lower securing bolts of two sides and remove the Cover Replacement
Dollies.
9. Put the front cover in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 53

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.3.2 Installing the Front Cover

1. Use a pad and set the Front Cover about 5mm above the
ground (see Figure 2-15).
2. Install the Cover Replacement Dolly on both sides of Front
Cover.
3. Holding the dolly handles, move the Front Cover toward to
the gantry.
4. Connect the cables to the Front Cover. See Step 1 on page 50
for reference.
Note: Raise the cover a little if you are finding difficulty installing
the cover.
5. Position the Front Cover. Make sure that all cables do not
touch the front Cover.
6. Install the Front Cover on the Gantry.
7. Attach the 2 Gantry Frame Bolts on the Gantry.
8. Release the top and bottom Securing Bolts of two sides and
remove the Cover Replacement Dolly.
9. Insert the Gantry Mylar into the Front Cover. It must fit
with nothing more than mild push. Figure 2-15: Install The Dolly On Front Cover

Note: Make sure that the Mylar joint is at 2 or 10 O’clock so it will not cover the DMS detectors during a
surview. If not, install it again. If the cover and Mylar cannot be replaced in their original location, you
may be required to re-adjust the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

Installing the Couch Base Front Cover (For Fix Patient

Table)
Performing Removing The Couch Base Front Cover (for fixed patient table) on page 47 in reverse.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 54

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Installing the Bridge Components (For Vertical Moveable

Couch)
Performing Removing The Bridge Component (for vertical moveable couch) on page 48 in reverse.

Installing the Column Covers

Performing Installing the Column Covers on page 46.

2.4 Rear Cover

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Rear Cover.

2.4.1 Removing the Rear Cover

Removing the Column Covers

Performing Removing the Column Covers on page 44 firstly.

Removing the Rear Cover

Remove the Gantry Rear Cover as following:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 55

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

1. Remove the Mylar.

2. Place it aside on a safe surface (see Figure 2-16).

Mylar

Figure 2-16: Mylar

3. Remove the Breath Navigation Board Cable1 from the rear cover(see Figure 2-17).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 56

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

Figure 2-17: Remove the Breath Navigation Board Cable

4. Attach the securing bolts on both upper and lower of the Cover Replacement Dolly to Gantry on one
side (see Figure 2-18).
5. Adjust the 2 adjusting bolts on upper and lower respectively, ensure that the two wheels are on the
ground well (see Figure 2-18).

Upper Adjusting Bolts

Upper Securing Bolts

Lower Adjusting Bolts

Lower Securing Bolts

Figure 2-18: Attach the Securing bolts

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 57

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

6. Remove the bolts on the rear Gantry frame (see Figure 2-19).
7. Pull out and move away the Rear Cover.
8. Release the upper and lower securing bolts of two sides and remove the Cover Replacement Dollies.
9. Put the Rear Cover in a safe place.

Figure 2-19: Rear Cover Securing Bolts

Figure 2-20: Remove the Rear Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 58

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.4.2 Installing the Rear Cover

1. Raise the Rear Cover about 5mm from the
ground(see Figure 2-21).
2. Install the Cover Replacement Dolly on both sides of
Rear Cover.
3. Hold the handle to move the Rear Cover to the
gantry.
4. Connect the Breath Navigation Board Cable1 to the
gantry.
NOTE Lift up the top a little distance if the rear cover
installed difficultly.
5. Position the Rear Cover. Make sure that all cables do
not touch the Rear Cover.
6. Install the Rear Cover on the Gantry.
7. Attach the 2 Gantry Frame Bolts on the Gantry.
8. Release the upper and lower Securing Bolts of two
sides and remove the Cover Replacement Dolly.
Figure 2-21: Raise The Rear Cover
9. Insert the Gantry Mylar into the Front Cover. It must
fit with nothing more than mild pushing.

Note: Make sure that the joint of the Mylar is at 2 or 10 o’clock so it will not cover the detector during a
surview. If not, install it again. If the cover and Mylar cannot be replaced in their original location, you
may be required to re-adjust the Front Cover and the Rear Cover.

Installing the Column Covers

Performing 2.2.2 Installing the Column Covers on page 46.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 59

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.5 Top Cover

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Top Cover.

2.5.1 Removing the Top Cover

Removing the Column Covers

Performing 2.2.1 Removing the Column Covers on page 44 firstly.

Removing the Top Cover

1. Disconnect the Top Fan cable (W107) from the gantry (see Figure 2-22).
2. Release 4 screws on the top beam of both sides(see Figure 2-23 on page 60).
3. Pull out the Top Cover and remove it.
4. Put the Top Cover in a safe place.

Figure 2-22: Disconnect The Fan Cable Figure 2-23: Top cover screws

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 60

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.5.2 Installing the Top Cover

1. Position the Top Cover. Make sure that all
cables do not touch the Top Cover.
2. Connect all the cables to the Top Fan.
3. Attach the Top Cover with the 4 screws of
left and right side see Step 2 above for
reference.

Figure 2-24: Top cover screws

Installing the Column Cover

Performing 2.2.2 Installing the Column Covers on page 46.‘

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 61

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.6 Slip Ring Cover

2.6.1 Removing the Slip Ring Cover
1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Turn Off the Gantry Main Power switch and wait at least ten minutes for the Slip Ring to
discharge. Take all electrical precautions after removing the Slip Ring Cover. Never touch the
Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always wear anti-static gloves when removing the Slip Ring.
2. Release the four screws (see Figure 2-25).
3. Remove the Slip Ring cover and place it in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 62

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.6.2 Installing the Slip Ring Cover

Note: Always wear anti-static gloves when installing the Slip Ring Cover.

1. Position the Slip Ring Cover on the Gantry.

2. Attach the Slip Ring Cover with four screws to the Gantry (see Figure 2-25 ).

Figure 2-25:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 63

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.7 Mobile Control Panel

This procedure explains how to install and remove the Mobile Control Panel.

Figure 2-26: Mobile Control Panel

Bypass Wire Right Emergency

Stop Switch Cable

M8 Screws

2.7.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 64

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.7.2 Estimated Time

Table 2-1: Estimated Time

Procedure Estimated Time Manpower

Installing the Mobile Control Panel on page 65 1 hour 1

Removing the Mobile Control Panel on page 71 1 hour 1

2.7.3 Installing the Mobile Control Panel

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

!
WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.
3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 65

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

4. Attach the Mobile Control Panel to the left Gantry frame with two M8 screws (see Figure 2-27).

Figure 2-27: Install the Mobile Control Panel

Note: The two M8 screws are shipped with Mobile Control Panel.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 66

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

5. Install the Bypass Wire on the Mobile Control Panel (see Figure 2-28).

Figure 2-28: Install the Bypass Wire

Note: The Bypass Wire is shipped with Mobile Control Panel.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 67

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

6. Install the Main Control Board Cable on the Mobile Control Panel (see Figure 2-29).

Figure 2-29: Main Control Board Cable

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 68

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

7. Connect the left Emergency Stop Switch Cable to the left Emergency stop LED Power Cable (see
Figure 2-30).

Figure 2-30: Left Emergency Stop Switch Cable

Note: The left Emergency Stop Switch Cable is shipped with Mobile Control Panel.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 69

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

8. Connect the right Emergency Stop Switch Cable to the right Emergency Stop LED Power Cable (see
Figure 2-31).

Figure 2-31: Right Emergency Stop Switch Cable

Note: The right Emergency Stop Switch Cable is shipped with Mobile Control Panel.
9. Power on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 70

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

2.7.4 Removing the Mobile Control Panel

This procedure explains how to remove the Mobile Control Panel.
1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Main Control Board Cable on the Mobile Control Panel (see Figure 2-32).

Figure 2-32: Remove Main Control Board Cable

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 71

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

3. Remove the Bypass Wire on the Mobile Control Panel (see Figure 2-33).

Figure 2-33: Remove the Bypass Wire

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 72

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

4. Remove the left Emergency Stop Switch Cable is shipped with Mobile Control Panel (see Figure 2-34).

Figure 2-34: Left Emergency Stop Switch Cable

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 73

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

5. Remove two M8 screws that attach the Mobile Control Panel to the left Gantry frame (see Figure 2-35).

Figure 2-35: Remove Two M8 Screws

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 74

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Covers Repair & Replacement

6. Remove the right Emergency Stop Switch Cable (see Figure 2-36).

Figure 2-36: Remove the Right Emergency Stop Switch

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 75

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 76

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 77

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.1 Z-Position Detection Board

This section explains how to remove and replace the Z-Position Detection Board.

Figure 3-2: Z-Position Detection Board

3.1.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Mobile Control Panel

3.1.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-1:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.1.3 Removing the Z-Position Board on page 79 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 78

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Table 3-1:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.1.4 Installing the Z-Position Detection Board on page 82 0.5 hours 1

3.1.3 Removing the Z-Position Board

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the column cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 79

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the Front

Cover on page 47).
4. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock and lock
the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
5. Remove 7 screws which attach the A-plane Cover of
the Collimator System (see Figure 3-3).
6. Remove the Collimator Cover.
7. Before disconnecting the cables, label each cable and
its appropriate connector.
8. Remove 2 screws that attach the aluminum detection
plate(see Figure 3-4).
9. Take off the aluminum detection plate.

!
WARNING: Make sure the aluminum detection Figure 3-3: A-plane Cover
plate not touch with the optical
coupler.
10. Release 2 screws on the top of the Z-Position
Detection Board bracket(see Figure 3-5).
11. Unplug the Z-Position Detection Board with
bracket(see Figure 3-5).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 80

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-5:
Figure 3-4: Z-Position Detection Board
12. Disconnect the Z-position Detection Signal Cable on
the back of the Z-Position Board(see Figure 3-6).
13. Remove the four screws that attach the Z-Position
Detection Board to its bracket(see Figure 3-6).
14. Remove the Bracket.

Figure 3-6:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 81

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.1.4 Installing the Z-Position Detection Board

!
CAUTION: Make sure the Flag is in the middle of aluminum detection plate, or the new Z position
Detection Board may be damaged.
1. Attach the new Z-Position Detection Board to the bracket with four screws (M3*12), torque=1Nm
(0.74lbf-ft.).
2. Connect the Z-position Detection Signal Cable on the back of the Z-Position Board (see Figure 3-6).
3. Attach the Z-Position Detection Bracket with two screws (M5*12), torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
4. Following the removal procedures in reverse to install the cable and aluminum detection plate. Refer
to Step 8 to Step 11 on page 80.
5. Attach the Collimator Covers with the 7 screws (M5*12), torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
6. Perform 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
7. Perform the appropriate Calibration and performance procedures according the Calibration Manual
and Performance Test Instructions.
8. Perform a few scans and check the image quality.
9. Complete the procedure 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 82

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.2 A-Plane Grid ASSY

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the A-Plane Grid ASSY.

Figure 3-7: A-Plane Grid ASSY

3.2.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Mobile Control Panel

3.2.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-2:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.2.3 Removing the A-Plane Grid ASSY on page 84 0.5 hour 1

3.2.4 Installing the A-Plane Grid ASSY on page 87 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 83

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.2.3 Removing the A-Plane Grid ASSY

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the

Front Cover on page 47).
4. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock
and lock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on
page 35).
5. Remove 7 screws which attach the A-plane
Cover of the Collimator System.
6. Remove the Collimator Cover (see Figure 3-
8).

Figure 3-8: A-plane Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 84

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

7. Remove the 2 screws that attach the

aluminum detection plate (see Figure 3-9).
8. Take off aluminum detection plate.

!
WARNING: Make sure the aluminum
detection plate not touch
with the optical coupler.

Figure 3-9: Z-Position Detection Board

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 85

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Remove the four screws that secure the A-

Plane Grid (see Figure 3-10).
10. Remove the A-Plane Grid.

Figure 3-10: Remove the Four screws attached A-

Plane Grid

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 86

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

11. Remove the four screws that secure the A-

Plane Grid ASSY(see Figure 3-11).
12. Remove the A-Plane Grid ASSY.

Figure 3-11: Remove the Four screws attached A-

Plane Grid ASSY

3.2.4 Installing the A-Plane Grid ASSY

1. Install the new A-Plane Grid ASSY, torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
2. Follow the Removing the A-Plane Grid ASSY on page 84 reversely.
3. Attach Collimator Cover with the four bolts, torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
4. Perform 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
5. Run calibration and performance according the Calibration Manual and Performance Test
Instructions.
6. Complete the procedure 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 87

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.3 Collimator Ball-Screw

3.3.1 Required Tools
• FSE Standard Tools

3.3.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-3:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.3.3 Removing the Collimator Ball-Screw on page 88 1 hour 1

3.3.4 Installing the Collimator Ball-Screw on page 100 1.5 hours 1

3.3.3 Removing the Collimator Ball-Screw

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Installing the Front Cover on page 54).
4. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock and lock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
5. Remove 7 screws which securing on the Collimator Cover.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 88

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

6. Remove the Collimator Cover (see Figure 3-12).

Figure 3-12: A-plane Cover

7. Cut the tie-wrap on Stepping Motor Driver.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 89

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

8. Remember the cable order then disconnect the cables connected to the Stepping Motor Driver (see
Figure 3-13).

Figure 3-13: Disconnect the cables connected to the Stepping Motor

Note: If the cables are short, you can remove the connector first, then disconnect the cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 90

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Remove the two screws on the connection plate(see Figure 3-14).

Figure 3-14: Remove the two screws on the connection plate

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 91

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Release the screw against the Ball Screw(see Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15:
11. Remove the four screws on Stepping Motor(see Figure 3-16).

Figure 3-16: Remove the four screws on Stepping Motor (only shows two screws)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 92

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

12. Remove the Stepping Motor and coupling together(see Figure 3-17).

Figure 3-17:
13. Remove the three screws on the plate(see Figure 3-18).

Figure 3-18:
14. Remove the plate.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 93

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

15. Remove the four screws/bolts and then remove the cover of Bearing(see Figure 3-19).

Figure 3-19: Remove the four screws /bolts (here only show three)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 94

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

16. Pull out the Ball Screw from the bearing base(see Figure 3-20).

Figure 3-20:
17. Record the sequence of Stack Spring(see Figure 3-21).

Figure 3-21:
18. Remove the Stack Spring.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 95

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

19. Record the orientation of the Bearings(see Figure 3-22).

Figure 3-22:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 96

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

20. Remove the Bearings(see Figure 3-23).

Figure 3-23:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 97

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

21. Remove the four screws securing the Ball Screw Nut Base, and remove the Ball Screw Nut Base(see
Figure 3-24).

Figure 3-24:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 98

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

22. Put the Ball Screw to a safe place(see Figure 3-25).

Figure 3-25:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 99

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Note: Do not remove the three screws securing on the connection plate.

Figure 3-26:

3.3.4 Installing the Collimator Ball-Screw

1. Install the Ball Screw Nut Base on the Ball-Screw with four screws (see Figure 3-24), and torque is
5.6Nm (4.1lbf-ft.).
2. Install the Bearings on the Ball Screw(see Figure 3-22).

!
CAUTION: You must follow 19 on page 96 to install the Bearings; otherwise it will affect the normal
operation of the Collimator.
3. Install the Stack Spring (see Figure 3-21).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 100

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: You must follow 17 on page 95 to install the Stack Spring, or there will be no force of the
Stack Spring.
4. Install the Ball Screw on the bearing base (see Figure 3-20).
5. Install the cover of the Bearing with four screws (see Figure 3-19), and torque is 5.6Nm (4.1lb-ft.).
6. Install the plate with three screws(see Figure 3-18), and torque is 5.6Nm (4.1lb-ft.).
7. Install the Stepping Motor and coupling together(see Figure 3-17):
• Fix the Stepping Motor with four screws(see Figure 3-16), and torque is 5.6Nm (4.1lb-ft.).
• Fix the screw connected with Ball Screw(see Figure 3-15), and torque is 0.5 Nm (0.37 lb-ft.)
8. Install the two screws on the connection plate(see Figure 3-14), and the torque is 5.6Nm (4.1lb-ft.).
9. Connected the cables to Stepping Motor Driver (see Figure 3-13).
10. Tie-wrap the cables.
11. Install the covers with seven screws (see Figure 3-12), and the torque is 5.6Nm (4.1lb-ft.).
12. Perform A-Plane Replacement related calibration, refer to Access CT Calibration and Adjustment
Instructions.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 101

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.4 Monitor Board

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Monitor Board.

Figure 3-27: Monitor Board

3.4.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.4.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-4:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.4.3 Removing the Monitor Board on page 103 0.5 hour 1

3.4.4 Installing the Monitor Board on page 105 1hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 102

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.4.3 Removing the Monitor Board

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover(see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the Front

Cover on page 47).
4. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock and lock
the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
5. Remove 7 screws which attach the A-plane Cover of
the Collimator System.
6. Remove the Collimator Cover (see Figure 3-28).
7. Disconnect the cable that attach to the monitor
board.
8. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 12 O’clock and
lock the Rotor.
9. Release 2 screws attach to the bottom of the monitor
board bracket(see Figure 3-29).
10. Release 2 screws attach to the top of the monitor
board bracket (see Figure 3-30). Figure 3-28: A-plane Cover
11. Take off 2 coaxial cables (see Figure 3-30).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 103

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-29: 2 Screws In The Bottom Figure 3-30: 2 Screws On The Top

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 104

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

12. Remove 4 screws that attach the Monitor Board (see

Figure 3-31).
13. Remove the Monitor Board.

Figure 3-31: Monitor Board

3.4.4 Installing the Monitor Board

1. Install the new Monitor Board, torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
2. Following the removal procedure in reverse to attach the cables.
3. Attach Collimator Cover with the four bolts, torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
4. Perform 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
5. Run Calibration and performance according the Calibration Manual and Performance Test
Instructions.
6. Complete the procedure 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 105

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.5 Monitor Detector

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Monitor Detector.

Figure 3-32: Monitor Detector

3.5.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.5.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-5:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.5.3 Removing the Monitor Detector on page 107 0.5 hour 1

3.5.4 Installing the Monitor Detector on page 109 1 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 106

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.5.3 Removing the Monitor Detector

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page

47).
4. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock and lock
the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
5. Remove 7 screws which attach the A-plane Cover
from the Collimator System (see Figure 3-33).
6. Remove the Collimator Cover.

Figure 3-33: A-plane Cover

7. Disconnect and remove the two coaxial cables (see Figure 3-34).
8. Pull the A-plane until the detector is completely exposed (see Figure 3-35).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 107

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-34: Coaxial Cables Figure 3-35: Remove The Eight Screws

9. Remove the two screws attached the Monitor

Detector (see Figure 3-35).
10. Remove the Monitor Detector(see Figure 3-36).

Figure 3-36: Monitor Detector

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 108

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.5.4 Installing the Monitor Detector

1. Install the new Monitor Detector, torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
2. Following the removal procedure in reverse to attach the cables.
3. Attach Collimator Cover with the 7 screws, torque=5Nm (3.6lbf-ft.).
4. Perform Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
5. Run Calibration and performance according the Calibration Manual and Performance Test
Instructions.
6. Complete the procedure Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 109

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.6 Stepping Motor

This procedure explains how to remove and install the Stepping Motor.

Figure 3-37: Stepping Motor Moon’s

3.6.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.6.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-6:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.6.3 Removing the Stepping Motor on page 111 1 hour 1

3.6.4 Installing the Stepping Motor on page 113 1.5 hours 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 110

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.6.3 Removing the Stepping Motor

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System ).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Open the Front Cover (see Front Cover ).

4. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock and lock
the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
5. Remove 7 screws which attach the A-plane Cover of
the Collimator System.
6. Remove the Collimator Cover (see Figure 3-38).
7. Disconnect the encoder cable(see Figure 3-39).
8. Release 4 screws that attach to the stepping
motor(see Figure 3-39).
9. Release the screw on the shaft-joint(see Figure 3-40).

Figure 3-38: A-plane Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 111

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-39: Stepping Motor Figure 3-40: Screw On The Shaft-joint

10. Remember the cable order then disconnect the power cable from stepping motor driver(see Figure 3-41).
11. Pull out the stepping motor(see Figure 3-42).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 112

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-41: Power Cable Figure 3-42:

3.6.4 Installing the Stepping Motor

1. Install the new Stepping Motor to its original position. Torque=5Nm (3.6 lb-ft.)
2. Tighten the Lock Bolt of the shaft-joint that connects the Stepping Motor. Torque= 1Nm (0.7 lb-ft.)
3. Attach all cables with tie-wraps in its original position.
4. Attach the Collimator Cover with 7 screws, torque=5Nm (3.6lb-ft.).
5. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 113

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.7 Stepping Motor Driver

This procedure explains how to remove and install the Stepping Motor Driver.
There are two types of Stepping Motor Driver.
Type A:

Figure 3-43: Stepping Motor Driver Type A

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 114

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Type B:

Figure 3-44: Stepping Motor Driver Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 115

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Note: If replacing Stepping Motor Driver Type A with Type B, connect Group1 Connectors on Stepping Motor
Driver Type B. If the Group 1 connectors are broken, connect to the Group 2 connectors (see Figure 3-45);
and connecting cables by aligning the identification on cable labels (such as STEP+, DIR+...) with the
marking (such as STEP+, DIR+...) on PCBA.

X2 X4

Group 1 Group 2

X1 X3

Figure 3-45:
Table 3-7: Connection Description when replacing Stepping Motor Driver A with B

Stepping Motor Driver A Stepping Motor Driver B

G205 (Connector) Connect to X1, X2 (Group1 Connector)

Connect to X3, X4(Group 2 Connector) if Group 1 connectors are broken

3.7.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 116

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.7.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-8:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing the Stepping Motor Driver Type A on page 117 1 hour 1 person

Removing the Stepping Motor Driver Type B on page 118 1 hour 1 person

Installing the Stepping Motor Driver Type A on page 120 1 hour 1 person

Installing the Stepping Motor Driver Type B on page 121 1 hour 1 person

3.7.3 Removing the Stepping Motor Driver

Removing the Stepping Motor Driver Type A

1. Adjust the Patient Support to the lowest position.
2. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
3. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

4. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover ).
5. Manually rotate the Stepping Motor Driver to 6 O’clock position, and lock the Rotor.
6. Label the cables connected to the Stepping Motor Driver Type A before disconnecting them.
7. Disconnect the cables to Stepping Motor Driver Type A (see Figure 3-46).
8. Remove the four screws attached the Stepping Motor Driver Type A (see Figure 3-46).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 117

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Remove the Stepping Motor Driver Type A in a safe place.

Figure 3-46: Stepping Motor Driver Type A

Removing the Stepping Motor Driver Type B

1. Adjust the Patient Support to the lowest position.
2. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
3. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

4. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover ).
5. Manually rotate the Stepping Motor Driver to 6 O’clock position, and lock the Rotor.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 118

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

6. Label the cables connected to the Stepping Motor Driver Type B before disconnecting them.
7. Disconnect the cables to Stepping Motor Driver Type B.
8. Remove the four screws attached the Stepping Motor Driver Type B (see Figure 3-47).

Figure 3-47: Stepping Motor Driver Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 119

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.7.4 Installing the Stepping Motor Driver

Installing the Stepping Motor Driver Type A

1. The proper current setting for each motor is shown on the individual torque vs. speed curves. Use this
current level to obtain the torque shown.
2. Default setting for each motor is shown as below:
• DIP Switch: default setting (see Figure 3-48).

Figure 3-48: DIP Switch for Default Setting

Note: The black shows the pin position.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 120

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

• Rotation Switch: default setting D (see Figure 3-49).

Figure 3-49: Rotation Switch for Default Setting

3. To install the new Stepping Motor Driver Type A, perform the removal procedure in reverse.
• Install the Stepping Motor Driver on the bracket with four screws: Torque=0.5 Nm.
• Install the Stepping Motor Driver assembly with four screws: Torque=2.8 Nm.
4. Unlock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35)
5. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

Installing the Stepping Motor Driver Type B

1. Align the Stepping Motor Driver Type B with Gantry Frame.
2. Install the Stepping Motor Driver Type B with four screws(see Figure 3-50), with a torque of 0.5Nm
(0.37 lb-ft).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 121

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3. Remove the four connectors from Stepping Motor Driver Type B (see Figure 3-50).

Connector

Figure 3-50: Connector for Stepping Motor Driver Type B (for example)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 122

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

4. Connect and fasten the cables on connectors as labeled.

Figure 3-51: Label the connectors

5. Install and fix the four connectors on the Stepping Motor Driver Type B.
6. Unlock the Rotor, refer to 1.4.2 Locking the Rotor on page 35.
7. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 123

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.8 Left Gantry Panel

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the left Gantry Panel.

Figure 3-52: Left Gantry Panel

3.8.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.8.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-9:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.8.3 Removing the Left Gantry Panel on page 125 0.5 hour 1

3.8.4 Installing the Left Gantry Panel on page 125 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 124

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.8.3 Removing the Left Gantry Panel

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off .

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page

47).
4. Disconnect 3 cables from the Left Gantry Panel
Board (see Figure 3-53).
5. Remove the four bolts which attach the Left Gantry
Panel to the Gantry and remove it from Gantry.

Figure 3-53: Left Gantry Panel Board

3.8.4 Installing the Left Gantry Panel

1. Attach the new Left Gantry Panel to the Gantry with four screws.
2. Following (see Removing the Left Gantry Panel on page 125) in reverse to attach the cables.
3. Perform 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 125

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.9 Right Gantry Panel

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the right Gantry Panel.

Figure 3-54: Right Gantry Panel

3.9.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.9.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-10:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.9.3 Removing the Right Gantry Panel on page 127 0.5 hour 1

3.9.4 Installing the Right Gantry Panel on page 127 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 126

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.9.3 Removing the Right Gantry Panel

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off .

3. Remove the Front Cover(see Front Cover on page

47).
4. Disconnect the cable from the Right Gantry Panel
Board (see Figure 3-55).
5. Remove the four bolts which attach the Right Gantry
Panel to the Gantry and remove it from Gantry.
6. Remove the Right Gantry Panel from Gantry.

Figure 3-55: Right Gantry Panel

3.9.4 Installing the Right Gantry Panel

1. Attach the new Right Gantry Panel to the Gantry with four screws.
2. Following (see Removing the Right Gantry Panel on page 127) in reverse to attach the cables.
3. Perform 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 127

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.10 Transformer for DMS and DMS Heater(T201)

The following procedure explains how to remove and install the Transformer (T201).

Figure 3-56: Transformer EI-07--6-2RC (T201)

3.10.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 128

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.10.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-11:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.10.3 Removing the Transformer (T201) on page 129 0.5 hour 1

Installing the Transformer (T201) on page 130 0.5 hour 1

3.10.3 Removing the Transformer (T201)

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

!
WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page 47).

4. Lock the Gantry.
5. Label the cables connected to the Transformer (T201).
6. Disconnect the cables to Transformer (T201) (see Figure 3-57).
7. Remove the four screws which attach the Transformer on both sides (see Figure 3-58).
8. Remove the Transformer carefully.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 129

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-57: Disconnect the Cables

Figure 3-58: Remove 4 Screws

3.10.4 Installing the Transformer (T201)

1. To install the new Transformer (T201), perform the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 130

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.11 Transformer for Rotor Control Board and

Collimator System(T202)
The following procedure explains how to remove and install the Transformer (T202).

Figure 3-59: Transformer EI-11-3-1RC (T202)

3.11.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 131

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.11.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-12:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.11.3 Removing the Transformer (T202) on page 132 0.5 hour 1

3.11.4 Installing the Transformer(T202) on page 133 0.5 hour 1

3.11.3 Removing the Transformer (T202)

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 132

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page

47).
4. Lock the Gantry.
5. Label the cables connected to the Transformer (T202).
6. Disconnect the cables to Transformer (T202) (see
Figure 3-60).
7. Remove the three screws which attach the
Transformer on both sides (see Figure 3-60).
8. Remove the Transformer carefully.

Figure 3-60: Disconnect and remove

Transformer (T202)

3.11.4 Installing the Transformer(T202)

1. To install the new Transformer(T202), perform the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 133

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.12 Switching Power Supply

• Switching Power Supply (G201) for DMS Heater
• Switching Power Supply (G202) for DMS
• Switching Power Supply (G203) for Rotor Control Board
The following procedure explains how to remove and install the Switching Power Supply G201, G202,
G203.
There are two types of Switching Power Supply (G201) on site:
• Type A: SP-320-48

Figure 3-61: Switching Power Supply SP-320-48 (G201-Type A) for DMS Heater

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 134

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

• Type B: RSP-320-48

Figure 3-62: Switching Power Supply RSP-320-48 (G201-Type B) for DMS Heater

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 135

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

There are two types of Switching Power Supply (G202) on site:

• Type A: SP-150-48

Figure 3-63: Switching Power Supply SP-150-48 (G202-Type A) for DMS

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 136

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

• Type B: RSP-150-48

Figure 3-64: Switching Power Supply RSP-150-48 (G202-Type B) for DMS

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 137

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

There are two types of Switching Power Supply (G203) on site:

• Type A: T-120B

Figure 3-65: Power Supply Switch T-120B (G203-Type A) for Rotor Control Board

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 138

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

• Type B: RT-125B

Figure 3-66: Power Supply Switch RT-125B (G203-Type B) for Rotor Control Board

Note: Power Supply Switch SP-320-48 (G201-Type A) replacing procedure is the same as replacing Power
Supply Switch RSP-320-48-48(G201-Type B); Power Supply Switch SP-150-48 (G202-Type A) replacing
procedure is the same as replacing Power supply Switch RSP-150-48(G202-Type B); here only mentioned
G201, G202.

3.12.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Cable ties

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 139

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.12.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-13: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203 (Type A)

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203 (Type A)

0.5 hour 1 person
on page 141

Installing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203(Type A) on

0.5 hour 1 person
page 144

Table 3-14: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) with G203 (Type
B)

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) on page 146 40 minutes 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) on page 150 40 minutes 1 person

Table 3-15: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A) with G203 (Type
B)

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A) on page 152 0.5 hour 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B) on page 152 40 minutes 1 person

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 140

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.12.3 Replacing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203

(Type A)

Removing Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203

(Type A)
1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

!
WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).
4. Lock the Gantry.
5. Label the cables connected to the Switching Power Supply G201, G202 and G203-Type A.
6. Cut the tie-wraps of the cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 141

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

7. Disconnect the cables to Switching Power Supply G201, G202, G203-Type A (see Figure 3-60).

Figure 3-67: Disconnect the Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 142

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

8. Remove the four screws which attach the Switching Power Supply Assembly on both sides (see
Figure 3-68).
9. Remove the assembly carefully and place it on a protective surface.

Figure 3-68: Remove the screws

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 143

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Mark the Switching Power Supply to be replaced, and place the Assembly upside down.
11. Release the screws of the Switching Power Supply to be replaced.
12. Remove the Switching Power Supply.

G201 G201 G202 G203

G203 G202

Figure 3-69: Remove the Switching Power Supply switch to be replaced

Installing Switching Power Supply G201, G202,

G203(Type A)
1. To install the new Switching Power Supply, perform the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 144

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.12.4 Replacing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) with

G203 (Type B)

Note: The screw used to fix the protection cover of Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) is changed to
M3 *8(see Figure 3-70).

Protection Cover

Figure 3-70:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 145

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Removing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B)

1. Power off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

!
WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).
4. Lock the Gantry.
5. Label the cables connected to the Switching Power Switch G201, G202 and G203 (Type B).
6. Cut the tie-wraps of the cable.
7. Disconnect the cables to the Switching Power Supply G201, G202 and G203 (Type B).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 146

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

8. Remove the four screws that secure the Switching Power Supply Assembly on both sides (see
Figure 3-71).

Figure 3-71: Remove four screws.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 147

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Remove five screws which secure the Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B) on back of the
Assembly (see Figure 3-72).

Figure 3-72: Remove screws

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 148

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Remove four screws which secure the Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B) to the bracket (see
Figure ).

Figure 3-73: Remove screws.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 149

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

11. Put the Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B) and bracket in a safe place (see Figure 3-74).

Figure 3-74:

Installing Switching Power Supply G203(Type B)

1. To install the new Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B), perform the removal procedure in reverse.

Note: Replace old W209 cables with new W209 cables shipped with new FRU.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 150

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.12.5 Replacing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A) with

G203 (Type B)

Note: The screw used to fix the protection cover of Switching Power Supply G203(Type B) is changed to
M3*8(see Figure 3-75).

Protection Cover

Figure 3-75:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 151

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Removing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A)

1. Remove the Switching Power Supply G203 (Type A). Refer to Removing Switching Power Supply
G203 (Type A) on page 152.
2. Remove the W209 Cables from X1 on the Rotor Control Board.

Installing Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B)

1. Install the new W209 Cables shipped with new FRU.
2. Install the Switching Power Supply G203 (Type B). Refer to Installing Switching Power Supply
G203(Type B) on page 150.
3. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 152

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.13 DMS FRU (Field Replacement Unit) Replacement

The Field Replacement Units for theAccess CT DMS are as follows:
• DMS FRU Replacement Preparation on page 154
• RCOM Replacement on page 156
• Detector Module Replacement on page 181
• Replacing the Detector Module Cable on page 195
• DMS Heater and Fan Assembly Replacement on page 206
• DMS Fan Assembly Replacement on page 224
• DMS Top Cover on page 235
• DMS Front Cover Replacement on page 241

3.13.1 DMS FRU Replacement Overview

!
WARNING: Comply with all instructions in the Access CT Safety Guidelines manual.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that you have the most recent and valid system backup before starting the
replacement procedure.
• Pay special attention not to damage the new FRU packaging. Some of the FRU packaging
is used to package the defective part for return to the repair center.
• Do not use Loctite except for Fan replacement.
• Always use a hex key with a ball end.

Table 3-16: Special tools

Description (as appears on eSPF)

Metric hexagon set with ball keys (Figure 3-76)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 153

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Table 3-16: Special tools

Description (as appears on eSPF)

Long (20 cm) Philips screwdriver with a magnetic tip

Telescopic Magnet (recommended)

Telescopic mirror (recommended)

Torque wrench with a range that includes 100 Ncm

Torque wrench with a range that includes 10 Nm

Tie-wraps

Chapman toolkit (a midget ratchet set)

Magnetic tool Extender

Figure 3-76: Hex Key with Ball End

3.13.2 DMS FRU Replacement Preparation

1. Move the Patient Table to the “0” position and limited Down position (just for the vertical moveable
couch).
2. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 154

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.

e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

Figure 3-77: Stopping HV Anode

3. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
4. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
5. Power Off the Gantry.
6. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
7. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
8. Remove the Gantry Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).
9. Remove the Gantry Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).
10. Manually rotate the DMS to the 12 o’clock position and lock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page
35).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 155

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.14 RCOM Replacement

Note: Before replacing the RCOM perform diagnostic troubleshooting. Refer to: Access CT Service Trouble
Shooting Guide.

Figure 3-78: RCOM

3.14.1 Removing the RCOM

1. Prepare the system for DMS FRU replacement. Refer to DMS FRU Replacement Preparation on page
154.
2. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).
3. Make sure all of the DMS connections are labeled correctly.
4. Disconnect all RCOM connections from the top of the DMS: J4, J2, J3, P10.

Note: You do not need to disconnect the ground cable.

5. Push the connectors to the back and out of the way.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 156

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-79: RCOM Connectors

6. Note the location of the optic cable connection.

!
CAUTION: Replacing fiber-optic cable incorrectly at the end of the replacement procedure will result in
system failure.
7. Disconnect the optic cable connector (1) and carefully put it back and out of the way.
8. Lift the RCOM Optic Transceiver locking lever (2) and remove the transceiver (3).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 157

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-80: Removing RCOM Optic Transceiver

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 158

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Open all 13 captive screws of the DMS front cover.

10. Remove the DMS front cover and put it aside in a safe place.

Figure 3-81: DMS Front Cover Screws

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 159

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: Each detector module cable must be replaced to its designated location on the RCOM PCB.
The detector module cables are labeled Access 1–9. Connectors on PCB are labeled P1–P9.
Swapping detector module cables will adversely affect image quality.
• Detector Module cables 2 and 8 may not be swapped with Detector Module cables 1 and 9.
• Detector Module cables 3 - 7 may be swapped with each other.

Figure 3-82: Match Detector Module Cable Label and Connector Designation

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 160

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-83: Detector Module Cable Designation

P5 P4
P6 P3
P7
P2
P8
P1
P9

11. Disconnect the nine detector module flat cables from the RCOM.
12. Disconnect the heater and fan connectors.
13. Release the 15 captive screws holding the RCOM to the DMS cradle.

Figure 3-84: RCOM Connections

Heater & Fan

connectors

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 161

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-85: RCOM Screws Locations

15 captive
screws

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 162

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

14. Holding the RCOM connector bracket at the top of the DMS (Figure 3-86), remove the RCOM from
the DMS.
15. Place the RCOM on an ESD surface.

Figure 3-86:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 163

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.14.2 Installing the New RCOM

1. Remove the new RCOM from its shipment box and the ESD packaging.
2. Remove all ESD caps from all 15 screws bushings of the new RCOM(Figure 3-87 on page 165).
3. Save the 15 ESD caps. They are required for return of the faulty RCOM.
4. Check the new RCOM for damage. Give Special attention to RCOM mounting screws.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 164

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.
• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (only blue residue on box) or cut, do not use the
FRU. Return the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting ESD bag or FRU box sealing tape, do not cut the ESD box.

Figure 3-87: Unpacking the New RCOM FRU

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 165

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

5. Remove the RCOM Optic Transceiver. For details refer to Figure 3-80 on page 158.
6. Holding the RCOM connector bracket at the top of the RCOM, insert the RCOM.

Figure 3-88: Insert RCOM

Transceiver
removed
Align gasket
with cradle

7. Align the gasket on the RCOM connector bracket with the cradle (see Figure 3-89).

Figure 3-89: Align RCOM Connector Gasket with Cradle

Align RCOM gasket flush with cradle.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 166

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

TIP: If the RCOM is sitting correctly, you should be able to screw in the captive screws without
resistance.

Note: Make sure all RCOM captive screws are completely opened. To facilitate the RCOM installation on the
cradle, hand loosen the captive screws so that they are at maximum height (Figure 3-90) and the screw is
above the bottom of the RCOM board (Figure 3-91).

Figure 3-90: Figure 3-91:

!
CAUTION: Do not use Loctite and always use a hex key with a ball end.
8. Insert the RCOM and gently press from the center of the edge of the card (see Figure 3-92) to slightly
compress the RCOM Connector Gasket to the Cradle.
9. While pressing the RCOM up, tighten the first two screws marked #1 and #2 in Figure 3-92.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 167

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-92: RCOM

1
2 Push RCOM up from here.

10. Tighten the rest of the 15 captive screws in the order shown in Figure 3-93 with a torque of 80 Ncm.

Figure 3-93: Tightening Captive Screws in Alternate Pattern

5 7 11 15 4

14
13 12
10
3 6
9 8
2 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 168

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: Remember to replace each PCBA detector module cable to its designated location on the
RCOM PCB. The detector module cables are labeled Access 1–9. Connectors on the RCOM
PCB are labeled P1–P9. Swapping detector module cables will adversely affect image quality.

Figure 3-94: Match Detector Module Cable Label and Connector Designation

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 169

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

11. Connect the nine detector module cables.

12. Connect the DMS heater and fan connectors: J17 and J18.

Figure 3-95: RCOM Connections

Heater & Fan

connectors

13. Connect and tighten all connections at the top of the DMS: J4, J2, J3, P10.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 170

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Note: If the ground cable was disconnected, connect the ground cable. Torque the M6x10 screw with 4 Nm/2.95
lbs-ft.

Figure 3-96: RCOM Connectors

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 171

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: Replacing fiber-optic cable incorrectly will result in system failure. The optic transceiver
locking lever lifts towards the back of the DMS. Inserting the optic transceiver incorrectly
can result in damage to the RCOM or optic transceiver.
14. Lift the RCOM optic transceiver locking lever and insert the RCOM transceiver into its connector.
Refer to Figure 3-97.
15. Push the locking lever down.
16. Remove the rubber insert from the optic transceiver. Refer to Figure 3-98.
17. Insert the optic cable connector into the same location marked in Step 6 on page 157.

Figure 3-97: Insert RCOM Optic Transceiver and Optic Cable Figure 3-98: Remove Rubber Insert

3
1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 172

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Note: When installing the DMS front cover, make sure to center the cover over the DMS cradle by tightening the
front cover screws in the order shown in Figure 3-99.
18. Assemble the DMS cover.
19. Tighten the 13 captive screws with a torque of 100 Ncm.

Figure 3-99: DMS Cover Screw Tightening Sequence

11 10

7 8

3 4
13
9 10 12
5
2
1

20. Unlock the Gantry locking pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
21. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 173

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

22. Cover all RCOM screws bushings with the ESD caps (Figure 3-100).
23. Package the old RCOM in the new ESD bag and shipping box, and send it to the repair center.

!
CAUTION: Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.

Figure 3-100: Repacking the Defective RCOM FRU

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 174

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Testing the New RCOM

IMPORTANT: The new spare part RCOM has the latest firmware installed. Verify the RCOM firmware. If the
RCOM must be programed, follow the RCOM programming procedure. Refer to Access CT
System Programming Instructions Manual.

Verifying RCOM Firmware

WARNING: When the gantry power is on and the front cover is open, do not touch any component in the
gantry.
1. Power ON the Wall Power Box.
2. Turn the Isolation Transformer ON (optional).
3. Turn the Gantry ON from the ON/OFF switch on the Right Column.
4. Turn ON the Host Computer.
5. Click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware Test.

Figure 3-101:

6. From the Component list, select DMS.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 175

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

7. Verify the RCOM Center register version:

a. Select Read Register.
b. In the Read Addr(Hex) textbox, type 1000.
c. Click Command.
d. From the Test Information list, verify the Data value is the same as the RCOM Center firmware
version found in the Software Installation manual for the software version installed on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 176

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-102: DMS Firmware Update RCOM Registers

8. Verify the RCOM Splitter register version:

a. Select Read Register.
b. In the Read Addr(Hex) textbox, type b000.
c. Click Command.
d. From the Test Information list, verify the Data value is the same as the RCOM Splitter firmware
version found in the Software Installation manual for the software version installed on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 177

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. If the firmware version is not the same, program the RCOM. Refer to Access CT System Programming
Instructions Manual.

Figure 3-103: DMS Firmware Update RCOM Registers

Verifying RCOM LEDS

• LEDs “5V”, “ANEG” and “APOS” on RCOM should be ON (green light) after power up (see Figure 3-
104 on page 179).
• LEDs “COMM”, “5V”, “ANEG” and “APOS” on RCOM should be ON (green light) after power cycle

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 178

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-104: RCOM LEDs

Performing RCOM Functional Test

Perform Performing Detector Module Detection Test on page 192 to verify the RCOM is functioning
correctly.

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

1. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.
d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.
2. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
3. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
4. Power Off the Gantry.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 179

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

5. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).

6. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
7. Close the front cover. Refer to Installing the Front Cover on page 54.

Performing Calibration
1. Power ON the Wall Power Box.
2. Turn the Isolation Transformer ON (optional).
3. Turn the Gantry ON from the ON/OFF switch on the Right Column.
4. Turn ON the Host Computer.
5. Calibrate the system according to the calibration matrix in the Access CT Calibration manual.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 180

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.15 Detector Module Replacement

Note: Before replacing the Detector Module perform diagnostic troubleshooting. Refer to: Access CT Service
Trouble Shooting Guide.

Figure 3-105: Detector Modules Class A and Class B

A A A A
A
A A
B
B A
A

Note: Detector Modules #2 and #8 can be

replaced by either module class A or B.

3.15.1 Identifying the Detector Module Class

!
CAUTION: There are two classes of detector modules. Make sure to order the correct detector module.
There are two classes of detector modules:
• Class A
• Class B
The two types of module classes have the following differences:
• locations in the detector module array
• part number

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 181

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Table 3-17:

Location slot (Figure 3-

Class Label
106)

A 1, 3, 4, 5, 6,7,9 Note: 12NC in figure on left is for

12NC
illustration only. Order from
B 2, 8 eSPF using 12NC on
defective detector module.

Figure 3-106: Detector Module Slots Locations

5 4 3
6 2
7
8 1
9

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 182

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-107: Access CT Detector Module 12NC Label Location

12NC is found
on detector’s
base and handle.

3.15.2 Removing the Detector Module

Table 3-18: Special tools

Description (as appears on eSPF)

Metric hexagon set with keys No 2, 3, 2.5, & 4

Torque wrench with a range that includes 100 Ncm

Torque wrench with a range that includes 4 Nm

Chapman toolkit (a midget ratchet set)

Dry and lint free cloth

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 183

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.

e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

Figure 3-108: Stopping HV Anode

3. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
4. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
5. Power Off the Gantry.
6. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
7. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
8. Open the gantry front cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).
9. Manually turn the rotor so that the DMS is at the 12 o’clock position.
10. Lock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).
12. Open all 13 captive screws of the DMS front cover.
13. Remove the DMS front cover and put it aside in a safe place. Refer to Figure 3-81 on page 159.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 184

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-109:

14. Disconnect the Detector Module flat cable.

Figure 3-110:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 185

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

15. Holding the Detector Module with its handle, unscrew the two captive screws.

Note: Do not unscrew the lower two screws.

16. Pull the detector module straight out and remove the Detector Module.
17. Place the defective module in the new ESD bag supplied with the new Detector Module FRU.

Figure 3-111:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 186

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.15.3 Installing the New Detector Module

1. Remove the new detector module from its shipping box and ESD bag.
• Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.
• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (only blue residue on box) or cut, do not use the
FRU. Return the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting ESD bag, FRU box sealing tape, and ESD label do not cut the Detector
Module box.

Figure 3-112: Removing New Detector Module from Packaging Workflow

1. Verify box is not 2. Verify Blue Quality Seal 3. Using knife cut 4. Pull out side flap and open 5. Remove and save 6. Remove Detector

damaged. tap is not missing or cut. the white and shipping box. Detector Module Failure Module ESD box.
the blue sealing Report and
tape. Return ESD bag.

4. Using a knife, cut the
8. Remove Detector 10. Pull out the side flap 11. Remove the Detector
end of the ESD bag and
Module box. and open the Detector Module.
remove the detector
9. Using a knife, cut open the Module box.
module ESD box. ESD sealing label.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 187

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

2. Visually check the detector module for damage.

3. Verify the detector module is the same class as the one to be replaced. Refer to Identifying the
Detector Module Class on page 181.
4. Using a dry and lint free cloth, clean the cradle surface and the grooves used to align the new detector
module.
5. Insert the module by sliding the Detector Module along its grooves and use the alignment pins to
hold it in place.

Figure 3-113: Detector Module Grooves and Alignment Pins

alignment grooves

Alignment pins

• Do not use Loctite.

• Always use a hex key with a ball end.
6. Holding the Detector Module by its handle, insert the two M5 screws
7. Tighten to the M5 screws with 4 Nm/2.95 lbs-ft.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 188

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-114:

8. Connect the Detector Module flat cable.

9. Verify the Detector Module Cable connector is correctly inserted and the side latches are closed.

Figure 3-115: Insert Connector Figure 3-116: Connector Not Inserted Correctly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 189

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Assemble the DMS cover.

Note: When installing the DMS front cover, make sure to center the cover over the DMS cradle by tightening the
front cover screws in the order shown in Figure 3-99 on page 173.
11. Tighten the 13 captive screws with a torque of 100 Ncm/8.85 lbs.-in.

Figure 3-117:

11 10

7 8

3 4
13
9 10 12
5
2
1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 190

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

12. Unlock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
13. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.
14. Complete the Detector Module Return Form.
15. Package the failed detector module and return it to the repair center.

Figure 3-118: Failed Detector Module Packaging Workflow

1. Insert failed detector 2. Insert ESD box and 2 3. Using zip lock, close the 4. Insert ESD bag and

module into ESD box. DESI packs into new ESD ESD bag. completed Detector Module
bag (supplied with FRU kit). Return Form into the shipping
box.

5. Close shipping box. 6. Insert packaging box side
flaps and close the box.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 191

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Performing Detector Module Detection Test

Perform the Bad Detector Detection Test to verify the Detector Modules are functioning correctly.
1. Power On the Wall Power Box.
2. Power On the Host computer.
3. Power On the Gantry.
4. Power On the UPS by pressing the On button.
5. Power On the Isolation Transformer (optional).
6. On the Host click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > DMS Test > Bad Detector Detection (see
Figure 3-119 on page 192).
7. Click Next.

Figure 3-119: Perform Bad Detector Detection Test

step 1

step 2

step 3

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 192

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

WARNING: Scanning with X-ray and patient table movement will follow. Make sure no one is in the
scanning room and the door is closed.
8. Click Start to perform scans.
9. In the DMS Bias/Noise Test window click Confirm.
10. Make sure all three tests pass with no failures (see Figure 3-120).

Note: In case of failure, replace the detector modules.

11. Click Exit to close the Bad Detector Detection window.

Figure 3-120: Bias / Noise / Signal Tests Passed

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 193

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

1. If needed stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.
d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.
2. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
3. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
4. Power Off the Gantry.
5. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
6. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
7. Close the front cover. Refer to (see Installing the Front Cover on page 54).

Performing Calibration and Performance Tests

1. Power On the Wall Power Box.
2. Power On the Gantry.
3. Power On the UPS by pressing the On button.
4. Power On the Isolation Transformer (optional).
5. Power On the Host computer.
6. Start the Anode:
a. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
b. Select HV > Anode.
c. In the Parameter lists select Start.
d. Click Command.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 194

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

7. Calibrate the system according to the calibration matrix in the Access CT Calibration manual.
8. Perform the Performance test according to the Access CT Performance manual.

3.16 Replacing the Detector Module Cable

Note: Before replacing the Detector Module Cable perform diagnostic troubleshooting. Refer to: Access CT
Service Trouble Shooting Guide.

Table 3-19: Tools

Description (as appears on eSPF)

Metric hexagon set with 3 mm key

Torque wrench with a range that includes 100 Ncm

3.16.1 Removing the Detector Module Cable

1. Move the patient support to the maximum out position.
2. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.
d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 195

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-121: Stopping HV Anode

3. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
4. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
5. Power Off the Gantry.
6. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
7. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
8. Open the gantry front cover (see Front Cover on page 47).
9. Manually turn the rotor so that the DMS is at the 12 O’clock position.
10. Lock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).
12. Open all 13 captive screws of the DMS front cover. Refer to Figure 3-122.
13. Remove the DMS front cover and put it aside in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 196

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-122:

14. Disconnect the Detector Module flat cable from the RCOM and the Detector Module.

Figure 3-123: Disconnecting Detector Module Cable

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 197

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

15. If you are removing the Detector Module flat cable for modules 1, 2, 8, or 9, open the cable clamp.

Figure 3-124: Disconnecting Detector Module 1, 2, 8, or 9 Cable

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 198

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.16.2 Installing the Detector Module Cable

1. Remove the new detector module cable from its shipping box and ESD bag.
• Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.
• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (only blue residue on box) or cut, do not use the
FRU. Return the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting ESD bag, do not cut the New Detector Module cables.

Figure 3-125: Removing New Detector Module from Packaging Workflow

1. Verify the blue quality 3. Open the
tape is not missing or cut. shipping box. 4. Using a knife, cut the end
2. Using a
of the ESD bag and remove
knife, cut the
the three detector module
white and the
cables.
blue sealing
tape.

2. Visually check the detector module cable for damage.

3. Select the correct detector module cable to use from the FRU kit.
There are three different detector module cable types. Refer to Figure 3-126.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 199

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-126: Three Detector Module Cables Types in Kit

Modules 1 and 9

Modules 2 and 8

Modules 3 to 7

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 200

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: The detector module cables are labeled Access 1–9. Connectors on the RCOM PCB are
labeled P1–P9. Swapping detector module cables will adversely affect image quality.

Figure 3-127: Match Detector Module Cable Label and Connector Designation

4. Connect the Detector Module flat cable to the RCOM and the Detector Module.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 201

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-128: Installing Detector Module Cable

5. If you are installing the Detector Module flat cable for modules 1, 2, 8, or 9, close the cable clamp.

Figure 3-129: Disconnecting Detector Module 1, 2, 8, or 9 Cable

6. Verify the Detector Module Cable connector is correctly inserted and the side latches are closed.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 202

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-130: Connector Not Inserted Correctly

Note: When installing the DMS front cover, make sure to center the cover over the DMS cradle by tightening the
front cover screws in the order shown in Figure 3-99 on page 173.
7. Assemble the DMS cover.
8. Tighten the 13 captive screws with a torque of 100 Ncm.
9. Unlock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
10. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 203

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-131:

11 10

7 8

3 4
13
9 10 12
5
2
1

Performing Detector Module Detection Test

Perform Performing Detector Module Detection Test on page 192.

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 204

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.
2. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
3. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
4. Power Off the Gantry.
5. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
6. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
7. Close the front cover. Refer to (see Installing the Front Cover on page 54).

Performing Calibration
1. Power On the Wall Power Box.
2. Power On the Gantry.
3. Power On the UPS by pressing the On button.
4. Power On the Isolation Transformer (optional).
5. Power On the Host computer.
6. Start the Anode:
a. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
b. Select HV > Anode.
c. In the Parameter lists select Start.
d. Click Command.
7. Calibrate the system according to the calibration matrix in the Access CT Calibration manual.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 205

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.17 DMS Heater and Fan Assembly Replacement

Note: If only the Fan assembly needs to be replaced, skip to DMS Fan Assembly Replacement on page 224.

Note: Before replacing the Heater and Fan Assembly, perform diagnostic troubleshooting. Refer to: Access CT
Service Trouble Shooting Guide.

Table 3-20: Tools

Description (as appears on eSPF)

Metric hexagon set with 3 mm key

Torque wrench with a range that includes 100 Ncm

3.17.1 Removing the DMS Heater and Fan Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 206

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-132: Stopping HV Anode

3. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
4. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
5. Power Off the Gantry.
6. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
7. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
8. Open the gantry front cover (see Front Cover on page 47).
9. Manually turn the rotor so that the DMS is at the 12 O’clock position.
10. Lock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 207

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-133: DMS Heater and Fan Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 208

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

12. Disconnect the Heater P1 connector.

Figure 3-134: Heater P1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 209

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

13. Disconnect the Fan cable connector from the DMS.

14. Disconnect the RCOM cable connector from the Heater.

Figure 3-135: Disconnecting Heater Fan Assembly

DMS Fan Connector

RCOM to Heater

15. Remove the four M4 screws and washers to release the Heater and Fan assembly from the Heater
Inlet.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 210

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

16. Remove the Heater Fan Assembly

Figure 3-136: Heater Fan Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 211

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.17.2 Installing the DMS Heater and Fan Assembly

1. Open and remove the new DMS heater and fan assembly, and mounting bracket from its shipping
box and ESD packaging.
• Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.
• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (blue residue on box), do not use the FRU. Return
the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting ESD bag, do not cut the new heater and fan box.

Figure 3-137: Removing Heater and Fan Assembly from Packaging Workflow

1. Verify the blue Quality 2. Using a knife, cut the
white and the blue sealing
sealing tape is not missing 3. Open the shipping box.
tape.
or cut.

4. Remove the heater and 6. Open the box and
fan assembly. remove the heater and fan
5. Using a knife, cut the end assembly.
of the ESD bag.
2. Loosen the 4xM4 screws and release the yellow shipping bracket from the Heater Fan assembly.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 212

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: When the M4 screws are released, the fan and heater will separate and may fall apart. Do
not pull out the M4 screws and make sure to hold the fan and heater together in order not to
damage the fan and heater assembly.

Figure 3-138: Remove Yellow Shipping Bracket

Yellow shipping
bracket

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 213

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3. Visually check the DMS heater and fan assembly for damage.
• Do not use Loctite.
• Always use a hex key with a ball end.
4. Insert and secure the four M4 screws with flat washer and SAF. lock washer to assemble the heater
and fan assembly.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the order of the washers are as shown in Figure 3-139 on page 214

Figure 3-139: Heater and Fan Assembly Screws and Washers Order

SAF Lock Washer

Flat Washer

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 214

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

5. Apply a torque of 150 Ncm/13.27 lbs.-in. to the M4 screws.

Figure 3-140: Fan

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 215

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

6. Reconnect the Fan to DMS connector.

7. Reconnect the RCOM to its connector on the heater.

Figure 3-141:

DMS to Fan
Connector

RCOM to Heater

8. Connect the Heater P1 connector.

Figure 3-142:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 216

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Unlock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).

10. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.
11. Dispose of the damaged heater and fan assembly according to your local regulations.

WARNING: When the gantry power is on and the front cover is open, do not touch any component in the
gantry.

Testing the New Fan and Heater Assembly

Verifying Fan and Heater Assembly LEDS

WARNING: When the gantry power is on and the front cover is open, do not touch any component in the
gantry.
1. Power On the Wall Power Box.
2. Turn On the UPS by pressing the Off button.
3. Power On the Gantry.
4. Power On the Isolation Transformer (optional).
5. Turn On the Host computer and log On as service.
6. Verify the LEDS:
• RCOM LEDs:
“5V”, “ANEG” and “APOS” on RCOM are ON (green light) after power up (see Figure 3-104 on
page 179).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 217

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-143: RCOM LEDs

• Fan and Heater Assembly LEDs:

3.3V - On (green), STAT - Off, PWM - blinking very fast (green), DRV - On (green).

Figure 3-144: Fan and Heater Assembly LEDs

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 218

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Performing Fan Functional Test

1. Verify Register 0xb102.
2. On the Host computer, click Processing > Advanced tab > Hardware Test.
a. Select Read register (see Figure 3-145 on page 220).
b. In the Read Addr(Hex) textbox type b102.
c. Click Command.
d. In the Test Information list verify the data is 0x0FA0.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 219

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-145: Testing Fan 0xb102 Register

3. Verify Register 0xb104

a. Select Read register.
b. In the Read Addr(Hex) textbox type b104.
c. Click “Command” for command executing
d. In the Test Information list, verify the data is 0x0FA0.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 220

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-146: Testing Fan 0xb104 Register

4. If the register 0xb104 test data is not 0x0FA0 use a calculator to convert the result from Hex to Dec and
verify the result data is within the range of +/- 10%.
a. On the calculator select Hex.
b. Enter the test data result.
c. Select Dec.
d. The result should be within the range of 3,600 - 4,400.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 221

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Note: If the register 0xb104 test data is not within the range, replace the fan and heater assembly.

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 222

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

6. Start the Anode:

a. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
b. Select HV > Anode.
c. In the Parameter lists select Start.
d. Click Command.
7. Calibrate the system according to the calibration matrix in the Access CT Calibration manual.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 223

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.18 DMS Fan Assembly Replacement

Note: Before replacing the Fan perform diagnostic troubleshooting. Refer to: Access CT Service Trouble
Shooting Guide.

Table 3-21: Tools

Description (as appears on eSPF)

Metric hexagon set with 3 mm key

Loctite 222

Torque wrench with a range that includes 100 Ncm

3.18.1 Removing the DMS Fan Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 224

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-147: Stopping HV Anode

3. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
4. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
5. Power Off the Gantry.
6. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
7. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
8. Open the gantry front cover (see Front Cover on page 47).
9. Manually turn the rotor so that the DMS is at the 12 O’clock position.
10. Lock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 225

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

12. Disconnect the Fan cable from the DMS.

13. Push the two grommets out of their grooves.

Figure 3-148: Disconnecting Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 226

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

14. Remove the four M4 screws to release the fan and fan guard from the fan housing.

!
CAUTION: Be careful not to drop the screw flat washer.

Figure 3-149: Flat Washer

15. Remove the fan and fan guard assembly.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 227

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.18.2 Installing the DMS Fan Assembly

1. Remove the new fan from its shipping box and ESD packaging.
• Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.
• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (blue residue on box), do not use the FRU. Return
the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting ESD bag, do not cut the new fan assembly box.

Figure 3-150: Removing Fan Assembly from Packaging Workflow

1. Verify the blue quality
seal is not missing or cut. 2. Using a knife, cut the 3. Slide the fan packaging 4. Using a knife, cut the end of the
white and the blue sealing out and open the package . ESD bag.
tape. 5. Remove the fan.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 228

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

2. Visually check the DMS fan assembly for damage.

• Loctite 222 is used on fan screws.
• Always use a hex key with a ball end.
3. Insert the new fan and the fan guard assembly as shown in Figure 3-151. The direction of the fan cable
is to the same side as the grommet’s groove.

Figure 3-151:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 229

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

4. Insert the fan cable grommets into the two fan housing grooves (see Figure 3-152).
5. Apply Loctite 222 to the 4xM4 screws.
6. Assemble the fan and fan guard assembly to the fan housing and secure with the four M4 screws and
washers.

!
CAUTION: Do not tighten the fan screw above 80Ncm.
7. Tighten the screws with a torque of 80 Ncm.

Figure 3-152:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 230

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

8. Reconnect the Fan connector to the DMS connector.

Figure 3-153:

9. Unlock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).

10. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.
11. Dispose of the old fan according to local regulations.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 231

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Testing the New Fan Assembly

Verifying Fan Assembly LEDS

WARNING: When the gantry power is on and the front cover is open, do not touch any component in the
gantry.
1. Power On the Wall Power Box.
2. Power On the Gantry.
3. Power On the UPS by pressing the On button.
4. Power On the Isolation Transformer (optional).
5. Power On the Host computer.
6. Verify the LEDS:
• RCOM LEDs:
“5V”, “ANEG” and “APOS” on RCOM are ON (green light) after power up (see Figure 3-104 on
page 179).

Figure 3-154: RCOM LEDs

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 232

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

• Fan and Heater Assembly LEDs:

3.3V - On (green), STAT - Off, PWM - blinking very fast (green), DRV - On (green).

Figure 3-155: Fan and Heater Assembly LEDs

Performing Fan Functional Test

Follow the procedure Performing Fan Functional Test on page 219.

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 233

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

4. Power Off the Gantry.

5. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
6. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
7. Close the front cover. Refer to (see Installing the Front Cover on page 54).

Performing Calibration
1. Power On the Wall Power Box.
2. Power On the Gantry.
3. Power On the UPS by pressing the On button.
4. Power On the Isolation Transformer (optional).
5. Turn ON the Host Computer.
6. Start the Anode:
a. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
b. Select HV > Anode.
c. In the Parameter lists select Start.
d. Click Command.
7. Calibrate the system according to the calibration matrix in the Access CT Calibration manual.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 234

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.19 DMS Top Cover

3.19.1 Removing the DMS Top Cover
1. Move the patient support to the maximum out position.
2. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.
d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

Figure 3-156: Stopping HV Anode

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 235

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Lock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).
12. With a 2 mm bit, remove the 2 Top Cover End brackets from the Cradle assembly by releasing the
4 x M3x10 screws.

Figure 3-157: DMS Top Cover End Brackets

!
CAUTION: Do not loosen or remove the screws coated in red from the top cover. These screws secure
the P-plane position. If by mistake these screws are removed, the DMS may need to be
replaced.
13. With a 2 mm bit, remove the 8 (Black Colored Only) x M3x10 screws from the two brackets holding
the top cover.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 236

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-158: DMS Top Cover Screws

14. Move the two top cover brackets to the sides.

15. Remove the top cover.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 237

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.19.2 Installing the DMS Top Cover

1. Remove the Top Cover from its shipping box and bubble wrap.
2. Visually check both sides of the new Top Cover are clean of scratches and marks.
• Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.
• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (blue residue on box), do not use the FRU. Return
the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting bubble wrap, do not cut the new top cover shipping cylinder.

Figure 3-159: Removing Top Cover from Packaging Workflow

1. Verify blue quality tape is not 3. Pull out the plastic cap. 4. Carefully pull out the

missing or cut. bubble wrapped top cover .
2. Using a knife cut the tape along the
edge between the carton sleeve and
plastic cap.

5. Using a knife, carefully 6. Verify the top cover is Caution: Do not touch the

cut along the width of the without any bends , dents , blue colored side of the
tape. or scratches. top cover!!

3. Assemble the new Top Cover on the cradle with the blue coated surface face down.
4. Replace the new Top Cover on the cradle.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 238

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

5. Replace the two top cover brackets over the M3 red coated screws.

!
CAUTION: Do not torque the screws until all of the screws have been hand tightened according to the
following instructions.
6. Start to install the top cover screws from the center out to the sides.
7. With a 2 mm bit, install the 8 x M3x10 (black only) screws to secure the two top cover brackets over
the top cover.
8. Start to torque the top cover screws from the center out to the sides.
9. With a 2 mm bit, torque the 8 x M3x10 (black only) screws to 80 Ncm.
10. With a 2 mm bit, install the 2 Top Cover End brackets from the Cradle assembly by inserting.
11. Tighten the 4 x M3x10 screws with a torque of 80 Ncm.

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 239

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 240

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.20 DMS Front Cover Replacement

3.20.1 Removing the DMS Front Cover
1. Move the patient support to the maximum out position.
2. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.
d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

Figure 3-160: Stopping HV Anode

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 241

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Lock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Fit the ESD wrist strap on one wrist and connect the alligator clip to an unpainted surface on the
gantry (see Connecting the ESD Field Service Kit on page 32).
12. Remove the 13 (M4x12) DMS front cover screws and put the cover aside in a safe place.

Figure 3-161:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 242

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.20.2 Installing the DMS Front Cover

1. Remove the DMS cover from its packaging.
2. Visually check the DMS cover for damage.
• Verify retaining rings are not oxidized.
• Verify the screws are not oxidized.
• Verify cover does not have any dents.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 243

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

!
CAUTION: If the front cover is damaged according to the above verifications, return the front cover and
order a new front cover.

• Follow ESD Protection Procedure on page 30.

• If the blue quality seal tape is missing (blue residue on box), do not use the FRU. Return
the FRU and order a new FRU.
• When cutting ESD bag, do not cut the new DMS front cover.

Figure 3-162: Removing Front Cover from Packaging Workflow

1. Verify the Front Cover 2. Release the shipping box 3. Open the shipping box and

shipping box is not damaged. straps. verify the ESD bag is not damaged.

4. Using a knife, cut open the 6. Remove all the shipping 7. Verify the retaining ring

end of the ESD bag protections from the DMS front and captive screws are not
5. Pull out the front DMS cover . cover. oxidized and all retaining
rings are in place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 244

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3. Align the two guidance pins with the DMS cradle and assemble the new DMS cover.

Note: When installing the DMS front cover, make sure to center the cover over the DMS cradle by tightening the
front cover screws in the order shown in Figure 3-99 on page 173.
4. Tighten the 13 captive screws with a torque of 100 Ncm.

Figure 3-163:

11 10

7 8

3 4
13
9 10 12
5
2
1

5. Release the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).

6. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 245

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Closing the Gantry Front Cover

1. Refer to Installing the Front Cover on page 54.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 246

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.21 Rotor Control Board

This section explains how to remove and install the Rotor Control Board.

Figure 3-164: Rotor Control Board

3.21.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 247

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.21.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-22:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.21.3 Removing the Rotor Control Board on page 248 1 hour 1

3.21.4 Installing the Rotor Control Board on page 249 1.5 hours 1

3.21.3 Removing the Rotor Control Board

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Perform the procedures in section DMS FRU Replacement Preparation on page 154.
3. Perform the procedures in section RCOM Replacement on page 156.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 248

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

4. Disconnect the cables from

connectors on the rotor
control board.
5. Remove the four screws on
the Rotor Control Board (see
Figure 3-165 on page 249)

Figure 3-165: Rotor Control Board ASSY

!
WARNING: Don’t pull the fiber optic data cable so violent or the cable may be damaged.

6. Pull out the Rotor Control Board ASSY using hands.

7. Remove the Rotor Control Board and set it in a safe place

3.21.4 Installing the Rotor Control Board

1. Install the new Rotor Control Board, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 249

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3. Update the firmware according to Access CT System Programming Instructions Manual. The
firmware file is available on the Host.

3.22 Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly

The following procedure explains how to remove and install the Rotor Laser Marker Assembly.

Figure 3-166: Laser Marker Assembly

3.22.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Mobile Control Panel

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 250

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.22.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-23:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.22.3 Removing the Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly on page 251 0.5 hour 1

3.22.4 Installing the Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly on page 251 3 hour 1

3.22.3 Removing the Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System
on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover(see Column Covers on
page 44).
3. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page
47).
4. Manually rotate the Rotor so that the Laser Marker is
at 6 o’clock and lock the Gantry.

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the

Gantry is Off .
5. Disconnect the Laser Marker cable.
6. Release the lock bolt that attach the Laser Marker
(see Figure 3-167) and remove the Laser Marker
Figure 3-167: Laser Marker

3.22.4 Installing the Gantry Rotor Laser Marker Assembly

1. Install the new Laser Marker Assembly, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 251

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.23 Temperature Sensor Board

This procedure explains how to remove and install the Temperature Sensor Board.

Figure 3-168: Temperature Sensor Board

3.23.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.23.2 Estimated Time

L
Table 3-24:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.23.3 Removing the Temperature Sensor/Rotation Zero Position Board on page 253 0.5 hour 1

3.23.4 Installing the Temperature Sensor Board on page 253 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 252

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.23.3 Removing the Temperature Sensor/Rotation Zero Position

Board

Note: The zero position function of the board is unavailable.

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System

on page 34).
2. Remove the Left Column Cover(see Removing the
Column Covers on page 44)

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the

Gantry is Off.
3. Disconnect the cable from the Temperature Sensor/
Rotation Zero Position Board.
4. Remove the four screws which attach the
Temperature Sensor/Rotation Zero Position Board to
the Gantry (see Figure 3-169) and remove the
Temperature Sensor/Rotation Zero Position Board.

Figure 3-169: Temperature Sensor Board

3.23.4 Installing the Temperature Sensor Board

1. Install the new Temperature Sensor Board, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 253

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.24 Main Rotation Frequency Converter

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Main Rotation Frequency Converter.
There are two types of Frequency Converter with different software version, and replacement procedure
is the same.

!
CAUTION: If replacing Main Rotation Frequency Converter Type A with Type B, firmware of Main
Rotation Frequency Converter and Ghost are changed, please refer to Access CT System
Programming Instructions to check and update if it is not the latest version.
• Type A: Software Version is V6.33

Figure 3-170: Main Rotation Frequency Converter (Software Version V 6.33)Type A

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 254

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

• Type B: Software Version is V8.73

Figure 3-171: Main Rotation Frequency Converter (Software Version V 8.73)Type B

3.24.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 255

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.24.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-25:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.24.3 Removing the Main Rotation Frequency Converter on page 256 1 hour 1

3.24.4 Installing the Main Rotation Frequency Converter on page 257 1 hour 1

3.24.3 Removing the Main Rotation Frequency Converter

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page 47).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

3. Lock the Rotor by the Locking Pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 256

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

4. Before disconnecting the cables, label each cable and

its appropriate connector.
5. Disconnect the cables from the Rotation Frequency Screw Bolts
Converter.
6. Remove the four screws that secure the Converter
Bracket on both top and bottom (see Figure 3-172).
7. Remove the Main Rotation Frequency Converter.

Figure 3-172: Top And Bottom Screws

3.24.4 Installing the Main Rotation Frequency Converter

1. Install the new Main Rotation Frequency Converter, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 257

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.25 Rotation Driver Power Supply Transformer

This section explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Rotation Driver Power Supply Transformer.

Figure 3-173: Rotation Servo Power Supply Transformer

3.25.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.25.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-26:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.25.3 Removing the Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer on page 259 1 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 258

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Table 3-26:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.25.4 Installing the Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer on page 260 1 hour 1

3.25.3 Removing the Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer

3. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

4. Remove the Column Cover (see Column Covers on

page 44)
5. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page
47).
6. Manually Rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 o’clock position
and lock the rotor.
7. Before disconnecting the cables, label each cable and
its appropriate connector.
8. Disconnect the cables that are connected to the
Motor Power Supply Transformer.
9. Remove the three bottom screws (see Figure 3-174).
10. Release the three top screws (see Figure 3-174).

Note: The transformer is heavy. Be careful

when removing it.

Figure 3-174: Rotation Servo Power Supply Transformer

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 259

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

11. Pick up and remove the Rotation Motor Power

Supply Transformer (see Figure 3-175), put it to a
safety place.

!
CAUTION: The transformer is heavy. Be
careful when removing it.

Figure 3-175: Transformer

3.25.4 Installing the Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer

1. Install the new Rotation Motor Power Supply Transformer, following the Removing the Rotation
Motor Power Supply Transformer in reverse.

!
CAUTION: The transformer is heavy. Be careful when removing it.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 260

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.26 Inverter Box

This section explains how to remove and replace the Inverter Box.
There are two types of inverter box. The screws location are different which is described as Type A and
Type B.

Figure 3-176: Inverter Box CT28 Type A

Figure 3-177: Inverter Box CT28 Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 261

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.26.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Mobile Control Panel

3.26.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-27:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.26.3 Removing the Inverter Box on page 262 1 hour 1

3.26.4 Installing the Inverter Box on page 265 1 hour 1

3.26.3 Removing the Inverter Box

3. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

4. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44)
5. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page 47).
6. Manually Rotate the Inverter Box in a proper position and lock the rotor.
7. Before disconnecting the cables, label each cable and its appropriate connector.
8. Disconnect the cables that are connected to the Inverter Box from connector J1.J3,J4 (see Figure 3-178).
9. Disconnect the FAN1 and FAN2 cables that are connected to the rear of Inverter Box (see Figure 3-179).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 262

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-178:
Figure 3-179: FAN cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 263

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

10. Release the lock.

11. Manually Rotate the Inverter Box to 12 o’clock
position and lock the rotor.
12. Remove the four M8 (Torque=20Nm 14.7lb-ft)
securing screws on the Inverter Box with 6mm Allen
Wrench (see Figure 3-180).
13. Take away the Inverter Box and put it in a safe place.

Figure 3-180: Remove the 4 Screws for Type A

Figure 3-181: Remove the 4 Screws for Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 264

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.26.4 Installing the Inverter Box

1. Install the new Inverter Box CT28, following the Section 3.26.3, Removing the Inverter Box in
reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
3. Perform Calibration and performance test according to the Calibration Manual and Performance
Manual.
4. Perform a few scans and check image quality.
5. Perform a full backup. See 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 265

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.27 Power Control Box

This section explains how to remove and replace the Power Control Box.

Figure 3-182: Power Control Box CT28

3.27.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Mobile Control Panel

3.27.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-28:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.27.3 Removing the Power Control Box on page 267 1 hour 1

3.27.4 Installing the Power Control Box on page 269 1 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 266

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.27.3 Removing the Power Control Box

6. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

7. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44)
8. Remove the Front Cover (see Front Cover on page 47).
9. Manually Rotate the Power Control Box to 6 o’clock position and lock the rotor.
10. Before disconnecting the cables, label each cable and its appropriate connector.
11. Disconnect the cables that are connected to the Power Control Box from connector JB1,JB2,JB3,JB4,J1,J2,J4,GND
(see Figure 3-183).
12. Release the rotor.
13. Manually Rotate the Power Control Box to 12 o’clock position and lock the rotor.
14. Remove the 4 M8 (Torque=20 NM) securing screws on the Power Control Box with 6mm Allen Wrench (see
Figure 3-184).
15. Take away the Power Control Box and put it in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 267

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

JB2 JB3 JB1

JB4

J4
GND
J3

Figure 3-183: Cables connect to Power Control BOX

Figure 3-184: Remove the 4 Screw

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 268

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.27.4 Installing the Power Control Box

1. Install the new Power Control Box, following the Section 3.27.3, Removing the Power Control Box in
reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
3. Perform Calibration and performance test according to the Calibration Manual and Performance
Manual.
4. Perform a few scans and check image quality.
5. Perform a full backup. See 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 269

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.28 Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor

This section provides the procedures on how to remove and replace the Main Rotation Frequency
Conversion Motor.

!
WARNING: Read and understand these instructions before starting. Failure to do so may result in
serious injury or death to the FSE, or serious damage to the CT Scanner.

3.28.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Rotation Motor Replacement Tool kit

Rotation Motor Replacement Tool kit

Figure 3-185: Carrier Vehicle Figure 3-186: Carrier Vehicle

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 270

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Rotation Motor Replacement Mode

Assemble the Cross Hanger Bracket and Fork Arm as figure for Rotation Motor Replacement.

Figure 3-187: Rotation Motor Replacement Mode

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 271

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.28.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-29:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

3.28.3 Removing The Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor on page 272 1 hours 1

3.28.4 Installing the Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor on page 282 1 hours 1

3.28.3 Removing The Main Rotation Frequency Conversion

Motor
1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

2. Remove the Left and Right Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove Front Cover (see Front Cover on page 47).
4. Remove Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 272

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

5. Rotate the X-ray Tube to 11 O’clock.

6. Before disconnecting the cables, label each cable and
its appropriate connector.
7. Disconnect the cables that are connected to the
Gantry Motor (see Figure 3-188).
a. Rotation motor power supply cable W122
b. Rotation motor encoder cable W123

Figure 3-188: Motor Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 273

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

8. Loosen the Locking Bolt, then unscrew the

Adjusting Bolt to release the Main Drive Belt (see
Figure 3-189).

Locking Bolt

Adjusting Bolt

Belt Pulley

Main Drive Belt

Figure 3-189: Belt Tension Mechanism

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 274

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Push the Main Drive Belt tension mechanism (see

Figure 3-190), so that the Main Drive Belt can be
removed from the Belt Pulley.
10. Remove the Belt Pulley M8 fixing bolt from the
center hole.
11. Push out the Belt Pulley from the motor shaft. If
difficult, insert the M12 screw into the center hole of
the Belt Pulley (see Figure 3-191) and tighten the
screw gradually to push-out the Belt Pulley.
12. Remove the 3 screws from the rear of the flange plate
(see Figure 3-192).

Figure 3-190: Main Drive Belt

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 275

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-191: Insert the M12 screw Figure 3-192: Push-out the Belt Pulley

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 276

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

13. Take out the Motor Carrier Vehicle and Bracket.

Flange Plate
14. Move the Carrier Vehicle with one hand make sure
that (see Figure 3-193)
a. The bottom of the vehicle hits the flange plate
b. The two blocks align with the motor fans.
15. Put the Bracket under the Carrier Vehicle with the
other hand slowly until the other side hits the
Gantry rear frame (see Figure 3-194). Make sure
the four wheels of the vehicle align with the
bracket on both sides (see Figure 3-195).

Block

Figure 3-193: Install The Carrier Vehicle

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 277

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-195: Align The Wheels On The Left Side

Figure 3-194: Align The Bracket With The Rear
Frame Of Gantry

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 278

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

16. Release the only screw attach to the Rotation

Motor in the front right (see Figure 3-196).

Figure 3-196: screw attach to the Rotation Motor

17. Secure the bracket with four screws in front and rear. See Figure 3-197 and Figure 3-198.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 279

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-197: Secure The Bracket In Rear Figure 3-198: Secure The Bracket In Front
18. Move out the Rotation Motor with handle carefully .
19. Remove the 4 screws attach the flange plate and put it in a safe place (see Figure 3-200).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 280

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Hole

Wire Box

Handle

Figure 3-199: Move Out The Motor Figure 3-200:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 281

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.28.4 Installing the Main Rotation Frequency Conversion

Motor

Note: There are three screw holes and one hole on the flange plate, which are used to connect to gantry frame,
make the hole and the Wire Box in the same side when installation the flange plate to Conversion Motor
(see Figure 3-199).

Note: Position the wire box on the right side to avoid collision with Rotor.
1. Install the new Gantry Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor following the Section 3.28.3, Removing
The Main Rotation Frequency Conversion Motor in reverse.
2. Adjust the tension of Main Drive Belt, more detail refer to Access CT Calibration and Adjustment
Instructions.
3. Connect all the cables which connected to the Frequency Converter and Rotation Motor.
4. Install the Rear Cover, Front Cover and Column Cover.
5. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 282

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.29 Fuses
This section provides the procedures on how to remove and replace the Fuses in the Power Control Box.

!
WARNING: Read and understand these instructions before starting. Failure to do so may result in
serious injury or death to the FSE, or serious damage to the CT Scanner.

3.29.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

3.29.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-30: Estimated Time for Removing/Installing the Fuses

Procedures Estimated Time People Needed

Removing the Fuses in the Power Control Box on page 284 1 hour 1

Installing the Fuses in the Power Control Box on page 289 1 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 283

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.29.3 Removing the Fuses in the Power Control Box

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

WARNING: There are voltages that discharge slowly (eight minutes). Wait for the capacitor discharge in
the following components:
• High Voltage area of the Gantry

2. Remove the Left and Right Column Cover (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
3. Remove the Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 284

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

4. Remove the four screws on the Power Control Box top plate (see Figure 3-201).

Figure 3-201: Power Control Box Top Plate

5. Place the Power Control Box top plate in a safe location.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 285

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

6. Disconnect the eleven connectors from the System Control Board (see Figure 3-202).

!
CAUTION: Remember the cables order before disconnecting all the cables

Figure 3-202: Eleven Connectors on the System Control Board

JB1 JB3 JB2

XP0108

XP0106 XP0104

XP0109 XP0107
XP0112
XP0110
XP0111

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 286

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

7. Remove the four screws which are attached to the System Control Board (see Figure 3-203).

Figure 3-203: Four Screws on the System Control Board

One Screw Not Shown

8. Place the System Control Board in a safe location.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 287

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

9. Now you can replace the fuses on the Power Control Board (see Figure 3-204).

Figure 3-204: Power Control Board

F5
F6
F8 F13
F11
F14
F10
F12

F4 F9 F7
F3
F2
F1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 288

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Table 3-31: Fuse Configuration and Part Reference

Configuration Part Reference

KLKD 1 600V(AC/DC)/1A 10.3mmX38mm F7F9

MULTICOMP 3A 250V Surge Protection 1.25inch×0.25inch F6

Slo-Blo 250VAC 0.5A 1.25inch×0.25inch F5

Slo-Blo 250VAC 7A 1.25inch×0.25inch F1F4

Slo-Blo 250VAC 12A 1.25inch×0.25inch F2F3

Slo-Blo 250VAC 5A 1.25inch×0.25inch F12F13

Slo-Blo 250VAC 20A 1.25inch×0.25inch F8F11

Slo-Blo 250VAC 8A 1.25inch×0.25inch F14

Fuse 250VAC 10A F10

3.29.4 Installing the Fuses in the Power Control Box

1. Install the Fuses in the Power Control Box, following the Removing the Fuses in the Power Control
Box on page 284 in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
3. Perform Constancy Test. Refer to Access CT Performance Manual.

3.30 Top Cover Fan

This section provides the procedures on how to remove and replace the Top Cover Fan on Gantry Top
Cover.
There are two types of Top Cover Fan, Type A is A2259-MBL TC.GN (see Figure 3-205 ), Type B is A2259-
HBL TC.GN (see Figure 3-206 ), and replacement procedure is the same.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 289

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Note: If Type A is needed to be replaced with Type B, make sure to replace the both top cover fans with Type B
together.

Figure 3-205: Top Cover Fan -Type A (A2259-MBL TC.GN)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 290

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

Figure 3-206: Top Cover Fan -Type B (AA2259-HBL TC.GN)

3.30.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 291

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

3.30.2 Estimated Time

Table 3-32: Estimated Time for Removing/Installing the Top Cover Fan

Procedures Estimated Time People Needed

Removing the Top Cover Fan on page 292 30 minutes 1

Installing the Top Cover Fan on page 295 30 minutes 1

3.30.3 Removing the Top Cover Fan

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Left and Right Column Covers (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the Top Cover (see Removing the Top Cover on page 60).
4. Disconnect the cables connected to the Top Cover Fan.

Figure 3-207: Disconnecting Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 292

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

5. Remove the eight screws fixed on the Top Cover Fan on the Top Cover.

Figure 3-208: Remove screws fixed on Top Cover Fan (Example)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 293

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

6. Remove the Top Cover Fan.

Figure 3-209: Removed Top Cover Fan (Example)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 294

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Front FRUs

7. Remove the four screws fixed on Fan Mask from the top cover fan, place it on a safe place to reuse it
on the new Top Cover Fan.

Figure 3-210: Removing the Fan Mask

3.30.4 Installing the Top Cover Fan

1. Install the Top Cover Fan on Gantry Top Cover, following the Removing the Top Cover Fan on page
292 in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 295

The following instructions describe the Repair and Replacement procedures for the heavy parts of the
Access CT Scanner Gantry, including the following sections X-ray Tube, HV Box, DMS ASSY and Gantry
Rotor Motor.

!
WARNING: It is required that you read and understand these instructions before starting. failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death to the FSE, or serious damage to the CT Scanner.

!
WARNING: When performing the replacement procedures, wait until both the X-ray Tube and Heat
exchanger are cool. Failure to do so may result in serious burn injury.

WARNING: When replacing the CT Tank Box, wait at least ten minutes for the CT Tank Box discharge,
failure to do may result in serious injury or death.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 296

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.1 Preparing to Replace Gantry Heavy FRUs

1. Move the Patient Table to the “0” position and to the Down limit position (just for the vertical
movable couch).
2. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.
c. Select HV > Anode.
d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

Figure 4-1: Stopping HV Anode

3. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
4. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
5. Power Off the Gantry.
6. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
7. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
8. Remove the Gantry Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).
9. Remove the Gantry Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 297

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.1.1 Estimated Time

Table 4-1:

Assembly Procedure for Estimated Time People Needed

Configuration for replacing the X-ray Tube 1 hours 1

Configuration for replacing the Tank 1 hours 1

Configuration for replacing the DMS Assembly 1 hours 1

4.1.2 Required Tools

• Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit (PN 459800924391) (see Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement
Tool Kit on page 299)
• Standard Service Tools Box
• Imperial Allen Wrench Kit
• Mobile Control Panel

4.1.3 Special Required Tools

• DMS T-Handle 8 mm (for removing the DMS)

!
CAUTION: Only use the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit. Only this tool is
approved for replacing the DMS.

Figure 4-2: DMS T-Handle 8 mm for DMS Removal/Installation

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 298

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.1.4 Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit

The Gantry Heavy Parts Tool kit can be assembled in three configurations:
• Configuration for replacing the X-ray Tube
• Configuration for replacing the Tank
• Configuration for replacing the DMS Assembly
Following the contents list of the Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit in Table 4-2 and Figure 4-4.

Figure 4-3: Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool Kit

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 299

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-4: Heavy Parts Lifting Tool

8
15 14 13
7
6

4
9

1
2

12 Need to be assembled.
3
11

Note: For the Hanging Bracket for Tank Replacement, the assembling procedures, refer to Assembling the
Hanging Bracket for Tank on page 302

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 300

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Table 4-2: Heavy Parts Lifting Tool

No. Description Modality Qty

1. Top Bracket All configurations 1

2. Bottom Right Bracket All configurations 1

3. Bottom Left Bracket All configurations 1

4. Holding Plate Connector All configurations 1

5. Hanging Rod Beam All configurations 1

6. DMS Hanging Bolt All configurations 1

7. DMS Hanging Bolt All configurations 1

8. Hoist Handle Wheel All configurations 1

9. DMS Hanging Bracket All configurations 1

10. Locking Pin All configurations 2

11. Hanging Bracket For Tank Replacement Tube configuration 1

12. Hanging Bracket for Tube Replacement Tube configuration 1

13. Hanging Rod Locking Socket All configurations 1

14. Bolts M8x25 + spring washer + lock washer kit All configurations 8

15. Bolts M12x30 + spring washer + lock washer kit All configurations 2

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 301

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Assembling the Hanging Bracket for Tank

The Hanging Bracket for Tank is assembled according to the following instructions:
1. Pick out the following components from the Heavy Parts Tool Kit.

Figure 4-5: Figure 4-6:

2. Secure the two frames on the plate with 4 secure clamps.

Figure 4-7: Figure 4-8:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 302

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.2 DMS Replacement

This section includes the procedures for the following DMS replacement using Heavy Parts Tools:
The DMS Replacement requires the assembly of the Cross Hanger Bracket and Fork Arm (Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-9: DMS Replacement with Cross Hanger Bracket and Fork Arm

4.2.1 Preparing the Gantry For DMS Replacement

1. Move the Patient Table to the “0” position.
2. for the vertical movable patient table lower the patient table to the lower limit position.
3. Stop the Anode.
a. Wait for the tube heat storage to reach 30%.
b. On the Host, click Processing > Service > Advanced tab > Hardware test.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 303

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

c. Select HV > Anode.

d. In the Parameter lists select Stop.
e. Click Command.
f. Continue the shutdown procedure when the Succeeded appears in the Test Information window.

Figure 4-10: Stopping HV Anode

4. Log Off the application and shut down the Host computer.
5. Power Off the UPS by pressing the Off button.
6. Power Off the Gantry.
7. Power Off the Isolation Transformer (optional).
8. Power Off the Wall Power Box.
9. Remove the Gantry Column Cover (see Column Covers on page 44).
10. Remove the Gantry Front Cover (see Removing the Front Cover on page 47).
11. Manually rotate the DMS to the 12 o’clock position and lock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page
35).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 304

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Assembling the DMS Heavy Parts Lifting Tool

Note: For numbered references in figures below, refer to Figure 4-4 on page 300.
1. Assemble part (2) to the bottom right bracket to the gantry frame with the 2 xM12x30 screws + flat
washers + lock washers + metal cube supplied with the kit.

Note: Once the optional mounting position is used, it will conflict with Gantry Heavy Parts Replacement Tool
Kit at the same side, FSE should be aware of this issue.
2. With a Allen key tighten the 2 xM12x30 screws with a torque = 82 Nm (60.5 lb-ft).

Figure 4-11: Assembling the bottom bracket

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 305

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Note: Make sure the 2 x (M12X30) screws are tightened into its screw hole.

Figure 4-12: Tighten M12x30

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 306

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

3. Insert part 4 into part 2. Figure 4-13:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 307

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4. Insert part 1 upper into part 4. Figure 4-14:

5. Assemble part (1) to the gantry frame
with the 2 (M8X25) screws.
Note: Assemble part 1 as shown in Figure 4-
4
14.
6. Torque the 2 (M8X25) = 24 Nm (17.7 lbf- 1
ft).

7. Insert part 7 (long hanging bolt) to part 9 (see Figure 4-15).

8. Insert end of part 7 (long hanging bolt) into notch on part 9.

Note: Make sure to assemble the longer hanging bolt part 7.

Figure 4-15:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 308

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Note: Make sure the part 7 pin sits in the part 9 grove.

9. Insert part 7 into the hole of part 4 Figure 4-16:

7 4

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 309

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

10. Screw part 8 onto part 7

Figure 4-17: Screw Part 8 onto Part 7

11. Make sure to assemble part 8 so that the wider end sits in the ring of part 4.

The heavy part lifting jig is now ready to remove the old DMS from the gantry.

Removing the Old DMS

1. Disconnect all connections at the top of the DMS: J4, J2, J3, P10, PE
2. Remove the PE screw and washers and set them aside.

!
CAUTION: Do not loose the PE screw and washers. They are used with the new FRU.
3. Use a tie-wrap to bundle the cables and push them back and out of the way.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 310

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-18:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 311

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
CAUTION: Replacing fiber-optic cable incorrectly at the end of the replacement procedure will result in
system failure.
4. Note the location of the optic cable connector.
5. Disconnect the optic cable connector and carefully push it back and secure it out of the way.

Figure 4-19: Disconnecting RCOM Optic Cable

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 312

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

6. Disconnect the Heater P1 connector.

7. Use a tie wrap to secure the connector out of the way.

Figure 4-20: Heater P1 Connector

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 313

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

8. Unlock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).

9. Manually rotate the DMS to the 6 o’clock position.
10. Lock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
11. Move the heavy part lifting jig into position, aligning the lifting jig pins with the DMS.
12. If needed change the height of the lifting pins.

!
CAUTION: Collision alert: Make sure to keep a distance between the A-plane and the top of long bolt.
13. Insert the lifting jig pins into the DMS as shown in Figure 4-21.
14. Secure the pins with the 2 safety pins.

Figure 4-21: Insert Lifting Jig Pins and Secure with Safety Pins

Safety pin

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 314

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
CAUTION: Only use the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit. Only this tool is
approved for replacing the DMS (see Figure 4-2 on page 298).
15. Release the 4 x M10x50 DMS mounting bolts and set them aside.
16. Do not loose the 4 x M10x50 DMS mounting bolts.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 315

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-22: Remove DMS Mounting Bolts

Figure 4-23: Four DMS Mounting Bolts

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 316

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

17. Swing the DMS lifting jig and move the DMS away from the gantry.

Figure 4-24:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 317

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
CAUTION: Make sure the PE screw is removed in order to improve DMS stability.
18. Set the DMS on the floor.

Figure 4-25: Set Old DMS on Floor

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 318

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
CAUTION: Do not allow any part of the jig, wrench, or securing bolts to make contact with the DMS top
cover. Any damage to the top cover requires replacement of the DMS top cover.
19. Remove the locking pins from the heavy parts lifting tool pins and remove the lifting jig.
20. Lay the DMS flat on the floor.

Figure 4-26: Lay Old DMS Flat on Floor

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 319

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Opening the New DMS Shipping Box

1. Position the shipping box on a flat surface.
2. Verify the Philips Logo bands are intact and not missing or cut.

Note: If the Philips Logo bands are not intact, return the FRU DMS.

Figure 4-27: Verify Philips Logo Bands are Intact

Philips Logo bands

3. Cut the tie wraps securing the shipping box cover latches.
4. Cut the Philips Logo bands.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 320

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-28: Cut Tie-wrap on DMS Shipping Box Latches

5. Turn the securing latches 360 degrees to release the top crate cover from the bottom crate cover.
6. Remove the DMS Shipping box cover and set it down.
7. Move the DMS Shipping box with the FRU DMS within the Heavy Parts Lifting Tool radius of
movement.

IMPORTANT: The anti-static wrapping covering the new DMS must be reused. Carefully cut open the
wrapping so it may be reused to cover the old DMS.
8. Cut open the anti-static wrapping covering the new DMS.
9. Remove all the shipping protections (red bubble wrap) from the DMS front cover.

Figure 4-29: DMS Front Cover Shipping Protections

10. Perform a short visual inspection that the DMS is not damaged. Include in the inspection the DMS
front cover:
• Verify retaining rings are not oxidized.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 321

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

• Verify the screws are not oxidized.

• Verify cover does not have any dents.
11. Replace the heavy lifting tool long hanging bolt (#7 in Figure 4-4 on page 300) with the short hanging
bolt (#6 in Figure 4-4 on page 300).
12. Insert the DMS lifting jig into the new DMS (Figure 4-31).
13. Insert the locking pin into the heavy parts lifting tool pins to secure the lifting jig.

Figure 4-30: Insert DMS Lifting Pins and Locking Pins

Safety Pin

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 322

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Note: If needed, cut the ESD shipping bag to enable swinging the old DMS away from the shipping box.

!
CAUTION: Only use the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit. Only this tool is
approved for replacing the DMS (see Figure 4-2 on page 298).
14. Remove the two M10x50 shipping bolts used to assemble the new DMS to its shipping box brackets.

Figure 4-31: Remove DMS Shipping Screws

M10x50 shipping bolts +flat
washer + lock washer

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 323

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

15. Swing the FRU DMS away from the DMS shipping box.

Figure 4-32: Removing FRU DMS from Shipping Box

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 324

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Assembling the New DMS

!
CAUTION: Collision alert: Make sure to keep a distance between the A-plane and the top of long bolt.
1. Swing the new DMS into its place on the gantry.
2. Adjust the height of the heavy parts lifting tool to align the DMS. Use the guide pins on the Gantry
(Figure 4-33).

Figure 4-33: DMS Guide Pins

Guide Pins

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 325

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

IMPORTANT: Use the 4 Self-Lock Pl screws M10x50 supplied with the FRU kit to assemble the new DMS.

Figure 4-34: New DMS Mounting Screws

Note: The new M10x50 DMS mounting bolts do not use washers or Loctite. The screws are self locking.

!
CAUTION: Only use the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit. Only this tool is
approved for replacing the DMS (see Figure 4-2 on page 298).
3. Insert and hand tighten the 4 Self-Lock Pl screws M10x50 so that the screw head makes contact with
the cradle.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 326

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-35: DMS Mounting Bolts Figure 4-36: DMS Mounting Bolts

!
CAUTION: Do not allow any part of the jig, wrench, or securing bolts to make contact with the DMS top
cover. Any damage to the top cover requires the top cover to be replaced.
4. Remove the safety pins from the lifting jig.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 327

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-37:

5. Remove the heavy parts lifting tool.

!
CAUTION: Only use the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit. Only this tool is
approved for replacing the DMS (see Figure 4-2 on page 298).
6. Only using the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit, torque the 4x (M10x50)
SHCS with torque = 55Nm (40.1 lbf-ft).
7. Unlock the Rotor (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
8. Manually rotate the DMS to the 12 o’clock position and lock the Rotor.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 328

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
CAUTION: Use the new PE screw and washers supplied with the DMS FRU kit.

Figure 4-38:

Note: If the ground cable was disconnected, connect the ground cable.
9. Cut the tie wrap securing the connectors to the rotor.
10. Remove the PE screw from the old DMS.
11. Connect the PE cable using the M6x10 PE screw and washers.

Figure 4-39: PE Screw Washer Order

Lock washer
Flat washer

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 329

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

12. Torque the M6x10 PE screw with 4 Nm/2.95 lbs-ft.

13. Reconnect all connections at the top of the DMS:
J4, J2, J3
14. Tighten the connector screws with a screw driver.

!
CAUTION: Replacing fiber-optic cable incorrectly will result in system failure.
15. Note the location of the optic cable connector.
16. Connect the optic cable connector.

Figure 4-40: Connecting RCOM Optic Transceiver

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 330

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

17. Connect the Heater P1 connector.

Figure 4-41:

Packaging the Old DMS

1. Replace the heavy lifting tool short hanging bolt (#6 in Figure 4-4 on page 300) with the long hanging
bolt (#7 in Figure 4-4 on page 300).
2. The old DMS is laying on the floor. Set the DMS vertical, as shown in Figure 4-42 on page 332. Using
the long hanging bolt (see part 7 in Figure 4-3 on page 299), insert the DMS lifting jig into the old
DMS.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 331

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-42: Det the Old DMS on Vertically

3. Insert the locking pin into the heavy parts lifting tool pins to secure the lifting jig.
4. Raise the old DMS using the heavy parts lifting tool and align it with the shipping box brackets.
5. Secure the PE screw to the old DMS. See Figure 4-43 on page 333.
6. Torque the M6x10 PE screw with 4 Nm/2.95 lbf-ft.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 332

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-43: PE Screw Washer Order

Lock washer
Flat washer

Figure 4-44: Raising the Old DMS

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 333

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Note: If needed, cut the ESD shipping bag to enable swinging the old DMS into position.

Figure 4-45:

!
CAUTION: Only use the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit. Only this tool is
approved for replacing the DMS (see Figure 4-2 on page 298).
7. Only using the DMS T-handle wrench found in the DMS Service Tool kit, secure and torque the
2x(M10x50) SHCS with torque = 30Nm (22.1 lb-ft).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 334

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Note: Secure the old DMS to the shipping box brackets using the 2x(M10x50) SHCS that secured the new DMS
to the shipping box brackets.
8. Insert the 2 desiccant bags into the ESD aluminum bag.
9. Seal the ESD aluminum bag.
10. Close the shipping box and lock the shipping box latches.
11. Secure the latches with tie wraps (Figure 4-28 on page 321).
12. Check all of the shipping labels on the box.
13. Remove the DMS Heavy Lifting tool. Follow the instructions in Assembling the DMS Heavy Parts
Lifting Tool on page 305 in reverse.

4.2.2 Completing the DMS Installation

1. Unlock the Gantry locking pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
2. Manually rotate the Rotor two turns (only clockwise direction) and make sure that there are no loose
or free parts that might cause damage to the system.

WARNING: When the gantry power is on and the front cover is open, do not touch any component in the
gantry.
3. Close the gantry front cover. Refer to (see Front Cover on page 47).
4. Power ON the Wall Power Box.
5. Turn the Isolation Transformer ON (optional).
6. Turn the Gantry ON from the ON/OFF switch on the Right Column.
7. Turn ON the Host Computer.
8. Calibrate the system according to the calibration matrix in the Access CT Calibration manual.
9. Perform the Performance tests according to the Performance Testing Instructions manual.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 335

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.3 X-ray Tube

This section provides the instruction on how to remove and replace a new X-Ray Tube.
The X-ray Tube Replacement Mode is assembled as following, assemble the Hanger Bracket, Cross
Hanger Bracket and Fork Arm as figure for X-ray Tube Replacement.

Figure 4-46: X-ray Tube Replacement Mode

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 336

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.3.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Imperial Allen Wrench Kit
• Gantry Heavy Parts Tool kit
• Loctite 243
• torque Wrench
• Mobile Control Panel
• Silicone paste and Silicone disk

Silicone Paste

Silicone disks

Figure 4-47: Silicone paste and Silicone disk

4.3.2 Estimated Time

Table 4-3:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

4.3.3 Removing the X-ray Tube on page 338 2 hours 1

4.3.4 Unpacking the New Tube on page 345 6 hours 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 337

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.3.3 Removing the X-ray Tube

The following procedures provide the instruction on how to remove the X-ray Tube.

!
WARNING: It is required that you read and understand these instructions before starting. Failure to do
so may result in serious injury or death to the FSE, or serious damage to the CT Scanner.

!
CAUTION: Before removing the X-ray Tube, open the new Tube package, observe the SHOCKWATCH
device. If the Shock watch is Red do not perform the replacement procedure. Contact the
SSD or local service support before performing the replacement procedure.

Figure 4-48: X-ray Tube Shockwatch Device

1. Perform the procedures in section 4.1 Preparing to Replace Gantry Heavy FRUs on page 297.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 338

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

2. Manually rotate the Tube to 12 o’clock position, and

lock the Rotor with the Locking Pin (see Locking the
Rotor on page 35).

!
CAUTION: Cover the DMS with the Protective
Mat to avoid accidently damaging
the DMS.
3. Protect the DMS by covering it with a Protection
Mat.
4. Label and note the positions of the cables that are
connected to the left side of X-ray Tube (see Figure 4-
49 on page 339).
5. Disconnect the cables connected to the left side of X-
ray Tube.
6. Note the tie-wraps positions, and cut the tie-wraps
that fix the Anode cable and Cathode cable. Figure 4-49: Left Side Connections to the X-ray Tube
7. Disconnect the Anode Cable and Cathode Cable form the Tank Box (see Figure 4-50), and protect the Anode and
Cathode unit with its protector.
8. Remove the six screws that fix the Inverter Box to the Gantry (see Figure 4-51).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 339

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Figure 4-50: Anode Cable And Cathode Cable Figure 4-51: CT Tube Cooling Fan ASSY

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 340

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

9. Remove the 2 screws on the both sides that attach to

the hoop (see Figure 4-52).
10. Remove the hoop from X-ray Tube carefully.
11. Loosen but do not remove the screw on the rear left
side of the X-ray Tube (see Figure 4-52) that attached
the X-ray Tube to the Gantry with the British Allen
Wrench.

Securing The Tube

Securing The Hoop

Figure 4-52: Left Side of the X-ray Tube

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 341

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

12. Loosen but do not remove the screw on the rear

right side of the X-ray Tube (see Figure 4-53) that
attached the X-ray Tube to the Gantry with the
British Allen Wrench.

Figure 4-53: Right Side of the X-ray Tube

13. Loosen but do not remove the screw on the X-Ray
Tube Front Support Bracket (see Figure 4-54).
14. Disconnect all the cables connected to the tube.
15. Check all the X-ray Tube cables and hoses are not
fixed to the Gantry.
16. Release the Locking Pin.
17. Remove the Protective mat that covers the DMS.
18. Rotate the X-ray Tube to 6 O’clock.
19. Lock the Rotor with the Locking Pin (see Locking the
Rotor on page 35).

Figure 4-54: X-ray Tube Front Support Bracket.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 342

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
WARNING: The Rotor must be locked before you remove the screws that attach the X-ray Tube.

20. Assemble the arm of Heavy Parts Replacement Tool (see DMS Replacement on page 303) and pull it towards
the Gantry.
21. Install the Hang Plate and Hook on the X-ray Tube and secure them with two screws (see Figure 4-55).
22. Rotate the handle wheel to adjust the Heavy Parts Replacement Tool in a suitable height.
23. Insert the Hang Plate into the Tube lift device. Install the screw at the bottom (see Figure 4-56).

Hang Plate

Hook

Figure 4-55: Fixing Hang Plate Figure 4-56: Bottom Fixing Screw

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 343

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

24. Remove the 3 screws on the X-Ray Tube Front Support Bracket (see Figure 4-55 on page 343).

!
WARNING: The X-ray Tube is released from the Gantry. Be careful when performing the next
steps.
25. Remove the CT Tube Cooling Fan ASSY and put it on the protection cover.
26. Pull the X-ray Tube out of the Gantry slowly through the Front Beam, move the CT Tube Cooling Fan ASSY at
the same time.

!
WARNING: Move the X-ray Tube and CT Tube Cooling Fan ASSY lightly and slowly to avoid
damage the cables connected between them.
27. Put the X-ray Tube and Tube Cooling Fan ASSY into the Package Box.

Note: Do not forget to remove the X-Ray Tube Front Support Bracket from the old Tube. This part will
be installed in the new X-Ray Tube.
28. Remove the 2 screws attached to the X-Ray Tube Front Support Bracket with the British Allen Wrench.
29. Pull out the X-Ray Tube Front Support Bracket.
30. Package the X-ray Tube and CT Tube Cooling Fan ASSY.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 344

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.3.4 Unpacking the New Tube

1. Move the new X-ray Tube into the CT Scanner Room near the Replacement Tool.
2. Release the clamps on the top and bottom covers of the Tube package(see Figure 4-57).

Top Cover

Body Cover

Bottom Cover

Figure 4-57: Rotate The Tube Package

3. Remove the top cover of the Tube package.
4. Remove the body cover of the Tube package.
5. Remove the top protective sponge.
6. Remove the plastic cover wrapped on the Tube.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 345

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

7. Remove the part of protective sponge(see Figure 4-58).

Remove this part

of protective sponge

Figure 4-58:
The new Tube is now ready to be installed.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 346

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.3.5 Installing the X-ray Tube

1. Insert the Hook of part 11 onto the Tube(see Figure 4-59).

Hook
of part 11

Figure 4-59:
2. Pull down the Tube with the Hook(see Figure 4-60).

Figure 4-60:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 347

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

3. Attach the Tube Front Support Bracket to the new Tube with 2 screws, torque =35Nm(29.5lbf‐ft)(see
Figure 4-61).

Figure 4-61:
4. Attach the Tube Hanging Bracket of part 11 to the Hook with 2 screws (X10), torque =
40Nm(25.8lbf‐ft).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 348

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

5. Insert the Tube Hanging Bracket of part 11 into

part 5(see Figure 4-62).
6. Secure the Tube Hanging Bracket of part 11 to
part 5 with 1 screw (M8*30), torque
=20Nm(14.8lbf‐ft) (see Figure 4-62).

!
WARNING: Make sure the red label is
upward when unpacking (see
Figure 4-63). 11
5
7. Adjust and move the new Tube to the Gantry.
8. Make sure the Tube aligns with its original
position.
Figure 4-62:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 349

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

9. Remove the screws on the red label to the Tube

and take the red label away (see Figure 4-63).
10. Install the red label on the old Tube.

Figure 4-63:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 350

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

11. Install the X-Ray Tube Front Support Bracket to

the Gantry with 3 screws (M10*30), torque
=40Nm(29.5lbf‐ft) (see Figure 4-64).
12. Attach the hoop with 2 screws on the both sides
(M10*30), torque =40Nm(29.5lbf‐ft).

Figure 4-64:

Note: Using the new screws in the package with the new Tube to install.

!
WARNING: Make sure all the screws are screwed tightly. Any mistake may result in serious injury to
FSE, or damage the Tube.
13. Attach the CT Tube Cooling Fan ASSY to the Gantry with 6 screws(M6*20), torque =9Nm(6.6lbf‐ft).
14. Daub the loctite 243 on the screws and tighten the screws according to the torque values.
15. Remove the Tube Lift Device from the new Tube.
16. Release the Locking Pin.
17. Manually rotate the X-ray Tube to 12 o’clock position and lock the Rotor.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 351

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
CAUTION: Cover the Tube with the Protective Mat to avoid damaging the Tube accidently.
18. Protect the Tube by covering it with a Protection Mat.
19. Clean the HV plug thoroughly with a clean lint-free cloth dropped with Ethanol absolute.

Note: Do NOT use solvents, lubricants, or oil to clean the HV plug.

Note: The Silicone paste is not a good insulator. The silicone paste is used to make the HV plug installation
into the ceramic HV socket easily and keep the entrapped air to a minimum.

20. Apply silicone grease in Tube Package on Anode Cable and Cathode Cable evenly.
a. Remove the protection hoops from the anode and cathode cables.

Figure 4-65:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 352

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

b. Apply silicon paste on the front of HV plugs.

Figure 4-66: Silicon paste (Example)

Note: Do not apply the silicone paste on the contact pin and do not apply the silicone paste on the cylindrical
surface of the HV plug.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 353

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

21. Put silicone disks on them and then apply silicone paste on them.

Figure 4-67: Silicon disks (Example)

Note: Do not apply the silicone paste on the contract pin and do not apply the silicone paste on the cylindrical
surface of the HV plug.
22. Connect the Anode Cable and Cathode Cable to the Tank Box.
23. Connect all the cables to the new X-Ray Tube.
24. Use tie-wraps to fix all the cables in their original position.
25. Remove the Protective Mat.
26. Follow the procedures in (see Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39).
27. Double click Access CT icon, and log on as philips_service.
28. Navigate to Processing > Service > Advanced > System Setting->Hospital Information to check
Build Number.
• If the Build Number is 0.31577 (see Figure 4-68) or lower than it, perform patch installation first to
upgrade the Build Number to 0.31580, refer to Access CT software Installation Instructions.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 354

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

• If the Build Number is 0.31580, no need to install patch, perform Step 29 on page 355 directly.

Figure 4-68: Build Number (Example)

29. Perform Calibration and performance test according to the Calibration Manual and Performance
Manual.
30. Perform a few scans and check image quality.
31. Perform a full backup. See 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

4.4 CT Tank Box

This section provides instructions to remove and replace the CT Tank Box.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 355

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

The Tank Replacement Mode is assembled as following, assemble the Hanger Bracket, Cross Hanger
Bracket and Fork Arm as figure for Tank BOX Replacement.

Figure 4-69: Tank Replacement Mode

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 356

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

!
WARNING: You are required to read and understand these instructions before starting. Failure to do so
may result in serious injury or death to the service engineer or serious damage to the CT
Scanner.

WARNING: After powering down the system, wait at least ten minutes for the Tank Box to discharge.
Failure to do may result in serious injury or death.

4.4.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• HV Wrench
• Gantry Heavy Parts Tool kit
• Mobile Control Panel

4.4.2 Estimated Time

Table 4-4:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

4.4.3 Removing the CT Tank Box on page 358 1.5 hours 1

4.4.4 Installing the CT Tank Box on page 361 2 hours 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 357

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

4.4.3 Removing the CT Tank Box

1. Perform the procedures in section 4.1 Preparing to Replace Gantry Heavy FRUs on page 297.

WARNING: After powering down the system, wait at least ten minutes for the HV box and AC Inverter
BOX to discharge. Failure to do may result in serious injury or death.

2. Manually rotate the Rotor until the CT Tank Box is at

2 O’clock.
3. Label each cable to show its connection.
4. Disconnect all the cables connect to the CT Tank Box.
5. Loosen the screws which attach the Anode and
Cathode with the HV Wrench and carefully pull the
Anode and Cathode out of the High Voltage Box (see
Figure 4-70), and protect the Anode and Cathode
with protective jackets.

!
CAUTION: Make sure you do not remove the
screws at this time.

Figure 4-70: Anode and Cathode

6. Remove the two brackets in front of the tank then loosen, but do not remove the four screws that attach the CT
Tank Box see Figure 4-71 and Figure 4-72.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 358

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

screw not shown

Figure 4-71: Ct Tank Box (Top) Figure 4-72: Ct Tank Box (Side)

7. Manually rotate the Rotor until the CT Tank Box is at 6 O’clock.

8. Lock the Rotor with the Locking Pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
9. Assemble the Heavy Parts Replacement Tool (see DMS Replacement on page 303).
10. Insert the long side of the Holding Rod into the Holding Plate Connectors (see Figure 4-73).
11. Fixing two screws at the end of each Holding Rod(see Figure 4-72).
12. Then the holding assembly is finished (see Figure 4-73).
13. Insert each Holding Rod into the Tank lift device and install the two fixing screws on the Hanging
Rod Beam (see Figure 4-74).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 359

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Holding Rod
Holding Plate

Figure 4-73: Holding Assembly Figure 4-74: Two Fixing Screws

14. Turn the Heavy Replacement Tools toward the Gantry.
15. Rotate the Handle Wheel to adjust the Holding Plate in a suitable height.
16. Insert the Holding Plate into the bottom of the Tank slowly (see Figure 4-75) and ensure that the other side of the
Tank is as Figure 4-76 shows.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 360

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

Tank

Holding Plate

Figure 4-76: Other Side Of The Tank

Figure 4-75: Insert The Holding Plate
17. Remove the four screws that attach the CT Tank Box.

!
WARNING: Make sure that the Rotor is locked. The CT Tank Box is released from the Gantry. Be careful
when performing this procedure.
18. Pull the CT Tank Box out of the Gantry.
19. Open the package for old CT Tank Box and lower the Holding Plate so that the old one can be put into
the package box.
20. Remove the Fork Arm and the Hanger Bracket from the CT Tank Box.

4.4.4 Installing the CT Tank Box

1. To install the new CT Tank Box, perform the 4.4.3 Removing the CT Tank Box on page 358 in reverse.
2. Perform calibration according to the Access CT Calibration Manual and then perform backup.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 361

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Heavy Parts Repair & Replacement

3. Perform the procedures in 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

4.4.5 Installing the New DMS ASSY

1. To install the new DMS ASSY, perform the 4.2 DMS Replacement on page 303 in reverse.

Note: Do not lose any part of the Heavy Parts Replacement Tools, any lost may be result this Tools can not be
used in next time.
2. Perform the procedures in 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
3. Unlock the Rotor with the Locking Pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
4. Update the firmware according the Access CT System Programming Instructions Manual. The
firmware file is available on the Host.
5. Perform Calibration and performance test according to the Access CT Calibration Manual and
Performance Manual.
6. Perform a few scans and check image quality.
7. Perform a backup. See 1.6 Performing Backup on page 41.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 362

This section describes the procedures to remove and replace the components at the rear of the Gantry.

1. Slip Ring Plate on page 364

a. Rotor Data Transmitter on page
401
6
b. Rotor Transceiver Board on 1
page 404
2. Gantry Stator Receiver (1.1Gbit/s)
on page 387 5 2
a. Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier
with PCB on page 393 4
3. Gantry Rotation Belt on page 380
4. Power Brush Block Assembly on
page 407
3
5. Gantry Stator Transceiver on page
399
6. Stationary Encoder Unit on page
412
7. Rotating Encoder Unit on page
414 (not shown)
8. Breathing Navigation Board on
page 417 (not shown)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 363

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.1 Slip Ring Plate

This section shows how to remove and replace the Slip Ring Plate.
R

Figure 5-1: Slip Ring Plate

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 364

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.1.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque wrench
• Sponge
• Feeler Gauge
• Anti-static Gloves, Micrometer

5.1.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-1:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.1.3 Removing the Slip Ring Plate on page 365 1.5 hours 2

5.1.4 Installing the new Slip Ring Plate on page 372 3 hours 2

5.1.3 Removing the Slip Ring Plate

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slipring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the Rear Cover of the Gantry.
2. Remove the Gantry Column Covers (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).
4. Remove the Slip Ring Cover (see Removing the Slip Ring Cover on page 62) and put it in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 365

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use gloves when removing or
installing the Slip Ring.
5. Lock the Gantry with the Locking Pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
6. Mark the position of the three aluminum detection plate screws (see
Figure 5-2).
7. Remove the three screws and the aluminum detection plate.

Figure 5-2: aluminum detection plate

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 366

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

8. Label all the cables connected to the Stator Data Receiver Assembly.
9. Disconnect all cables connected to the Stator Data Receiver
Assembly.
10. Mark the position of the two Stator Receiver Assembly bracket
screws (see Figure 5-3).
11. Remove the two screws attached the Gantry Stator Receiver
Assembly.
12. Take off Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly from slip ring plate.

Figure 5-3: Stator Receiver Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 367

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

13. Label all the cables connected to Power Brush Board.

14. Disconnect all the Power Brush Board cables.
15. Remove the Signal Brushes and Power Brushes (see Figure 5-4).

!
WARNING: The signal brushes and power brushes must be
removed before touching the Power brush board Metal Frame
or the bushes may be damaged.

16. Remove the four screws which attach the metal frame with Power
Brush Block Assembly and stationary encoder unit (see Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4: Power Brush

17. Disconnect the Slip Ring Signal Cables, Fiber Cable, and Power Cables from Slip Ring (see Figure 5-5 on page 369 &
Figure 5-6 on page 369).

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring without Anti-Static Gloves.
The Slip Ring Plate is heavy. Be careful when removing it.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 368

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

Figure 5-5: Power Cables Figure 5-6: Fiber Cable and Signal Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 369

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

18. Remove the 12 screws which attach the Slip Ring Plate.

!
WARNING: Pay attention when removing the screws. The Slip Ring plate is released from Gantry.

1 6

10
11

9
8
3

Figure 5-7: Slip Ring Plate

19. Remove the Slip Ring Plate, and put it on mat.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 370

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

20. Disconnect two cables which are connected to the

transmitter on the back of slip ring plate.
21. Remove three screws on the face of transmitter(see
Figure 5-8).
22. Remove the transmitter from the back of slip ring
plate.

Figure 5-8: Slip Ring Plate Back Transmitter

23. Disconnect all the cables which are connected to the
rotor transceiver board on the back of slip ring plate.
24. Remove eight screws on the face of rotor transceiver
board(see Figure 5-9).
25. Remove the board from the back of slip ring plate.

Figure 5-9: Slip Ring Plate Back Transceiver Board

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 371

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.1.4 Installing the new Slip Ring Plate

1. Open the package of the new Slip Ring, and put the
new Slip Ring on a flat surface.
2. Install the Rotor Transceiver Board and attach the
Rotor Transceiver Board to the Slip Ring Plate with
eight screws (see Figure 5-10). Torque=0.7Nm
(0.5lbf-ft.)
3. Install the Rotating Encoder Unit.

Figure 5-10: Slip Ring Plate Back Transceiver Board

4. Install the Rotor Data Transmitter and attach it to the
Slip Ring with three screws (see Figure 5-11).
Torque=0.7Nm (0.5lbf-ft.)

Figure 5-11: Slip Ring Plate Back Transmitter

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 372

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Connect the Fiber Cable and Power Cable between

Rotor Data Transmitter and Rotor Transceiver Board
(see Figure 5-12).
Note: Attach the cables with tie-wraps.

Figure 5-12: Slip Ring Back Cables

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring without anti-static Gloves.
The Slip Ring Plate is heavy. Be careful when Installing the new Slip Ring Plate.
6. Install the new Slip Ring Plate on the Rotor, make sure the Power Cables terminal (see Figure 5-13)
aligns with the Power Cables. Attach the Slip Ring with 4 screws but do not tighten them.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 373

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

7. Insert all 12 screws to the Slip Ring Plate. Tighten them by following the numbered sequence shown
in Figure 5-13.

1 6

10
11

9
8
3

Figure 5-13: New Slip Ring Plate

8. Use a Dial Gauge to align the new Slip Ring in the center of the Gantry. Measure the Radial offset as
following:
a. Position the Dial Gauge on the Gantry Frame (see Figure 5-14).
b. Rotate the Rotor and adjust the Dial Gauge so that Measuring Pin aligns at the Slip Ring Joint (see
Figure 5-15), and the compression of the Measuring Pin is at 1-5mm.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 374

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

Figure 5-14: Radial Direction Figure 5-15: Slip Ring Joint

c. Manually rotate the Rotor (Rotation speed <40s/r) for at least for one complete rotation.
d. Read the value of the Dial Gauge.
e. If the offset at a point is larger than 0.5mm, adjust the Slip Ring. Find the point which offset is
larger than 0.5mm, and manually rotate the Rotor so that the this point is at the 12 o’clock position.
f. Release all 12 screws.
g. Push the Slip Ring slightly to make the offset of this point within the tolerance and tighten the
screw at this point.

Note: To reduce the time required to complete the Slip Ring adjustment tighten only 4 screws at positions 1, 2,
3, and 4. Tighten the remaining screws when the adjustment is compete.
h. Tighten at lease 4 screws at positions 1, 2, 3, and 4.
i. After completing the Radial offset adjustments continue with the Axial offset adjustment in Step 9
on page 376.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 375

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

9. Measure the Axial offset as following:

a. Position the Dial Gauge on the Gantry Frame (see Figure 5-16).
b. Rotate the Rotor and adjust the Dial Gauge so that Measuring Pin touches the Slip Ring (see
Figure 5-17), and the compression of the Measuring Pin is at 1-5mm.
t

Figure 5-17: Axial offset

Figure 5-16: Axial Direction

c. Manually rotate the Rotor (Rotation speed <40s/r) at least for one complete rotation and read the
value of the Dial Gauge. If the offset between two or more points is larger than 0.5mm, adjust the
screw at specific points.
d. Tighten all 12 screws with torque wrench, torque=6Nm (4.4lbf-ft.) according to Step 7 on page 374.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 376

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

!
WARNING: When the Slip Ring adjustment is complete, apply Loctite 242 to all the 12 screws.
10. To complete the Slip Ring installation and adjustment, release one screw at a time from Slip Ring, and
apply a little Loctite 242 onto it. Use a torque wrench to fix it to original position. Torque=6Nm
(4.4lbf-ft.).
11. Repeat Step 10 above to re-tighten all of the other 11 screws that fix the Slip Ring.
12. After the Slip Ring adjustment and installation completed, install adjust the belt (see Installing the
Gantry Rotation Belt on page 386)

13. Install the zero position flag and bracket to its

original position and attach it with 3 screws(see
Figure 5-18).

Figure 5-18: Zero Position Flag And Bracket

14. Install the Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly (see Installing the Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly on page 392) to its
original position and attach it with 2 screws(see Figure 5-19).
15. Install the metal frame with Power Brushes Block and stationary encoder unit.
16. Install the power and signal brushes (see Installing the Power Brush Block Assembly on page 410) (see Figure 5-
20).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 377

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

Figure 5-19: Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly Figure 5-20: Mount Power And Signal Brushes

!
WARNING: To avoid damaging all the brushes install the signal brushes and power bushes after
fixing the Power Brush Board.
17. Connect all cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 378

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

18. Adjust Zero Index Pin to ensure the position of Rotating Encoder Unit is proper, which is on the right
of gantry rotor when facing the rear gantry cover. Refer to Access CT Calibration and Adjustment
Instructions.(see Figure 5-21 on page 379)

Figure 5-21: Zero Index Pin

Zero Index Pin

19. Install the Slip Ring Cover (see Installing the Slip Ring Cover on page 63).
20. Install the Rear Cover (see Installing the Rear Cover on page 59).
21. Install the Column Cover (see Installing the Column Covers on page 46).
22. Unlock the Gantry (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).
23. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
24. Perform a few scans and check image quality.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 379

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.2 Gantry Rotation Belt

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Rotation Belt.

Figure 5-22: Rotation Belt

5.2.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque wrench
• Anti-static Gloves
• Tensiometer

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 380

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.2.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-2:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.2.3 Removing the Gantry Rotation Belt on page 381 1.5 hours 1

5.2.4 Installing the Gantry Rotation Belt on page 386 3 hours 1

5.2.3 Removing the Gantry Rotation Belt

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the Rear Cover of the Gantry.
2. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).
3. Remove the Slip Ring Cover (see Removing the Slip Ring Cover on page 62) and put it in a safe place.

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use gloves when removing or
installing the Gantry Rotation Belt.
4. Lock the Gantry with the Locking Pin (see Locking the Rotor on page 35).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 381

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Label all the cables connected to the Stator Data

Receiver Assembly.
6. Disconnect all cables connected to the Stator Data
Receiver Assembly.
7. Mark the position of the three Zero Position Flag screws
(see Figure 5-23).
8. Remove the three screws and the Zero Position Flag.

Figure 5-23: Zero Position Flag

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 382

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

9. Mark the position of the two Stator Receiver Assembly

bracket screws (see Figure 5-24).
10. Remove the two screws attached the Gantry Stator
Receiver Assembly.
11. Take off Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly from slip ring
plate.

Figure 5-24: Stator Receiver Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 383

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

12. Label all the cables connected to Power Brush Board.

13. Disconnect all the Power Brush Board cables.
14. Remove the Signal Brushes and Power Brushes .

!
WARNING: The Signal Brushes and Power Brushes must be
removed before touching the Power brush board.
Metal Frame

15. Remove the four screws which attach the metal frame
with Power Brush Block Assembly and stationary
encoder unit (see Figure 5-25).

Figure 5-25: Power Brush

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 384

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

16. Release the Locking Bolt (see Figure 5-26), then

release the Adjust Bolt to release the Main Drive Belt
(see Figure 5-26).

Adjust Bolt

Locking Bolt

Figure 5-26: Belt Tension Mechanism

17. Push the Main Drive Belt tension mechanism (see
Figure 5-27), so that the Main Drive Belt can be
removed from the Belt Pulley.
18. Remove the Gantry Rotation Belt from the rear of the
Slip Ring.

Figure 5-27: Main Drive Belt (only for example)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 385

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.2.4 Installing the Gantry Rotation Belt

1. Install the new Gantry Rotation Belt to its original position, and adjust the tension of the belt, refer to
Access CT Calibration and Adjustment Instructions.
2. Install the Stator Receiver Assembly (see Removing the Gantry Stator Receiver on page 388).
3. Install the metal frame with Power Brushes Block and stationary encoder unit.
4. Install the power and signal brushes (see Installing the Power Brush Block Assembly on page 410).
5. Check all cable connections.
6. Adjust Zero Index Pin to ensure the position of Rotating Encoder Unit is proper, which is on the right
of gantry rotor when facing the rear gantry cover. Refer to Access CT Calibration and Adjustment
Instructions.(see Figure 5-28 on page 386)

Figure 5-28: Zero Index Pin

Zero Index Pin

7. Install the Slip Ring Cover (see Installing the Slip Ring Cover on page 63).
8. Install the Rear Cover (see Installing the Rear Cover on page 59).
9. Install the Column Cover (see Installing the Column Covers on page 46).
10. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 386

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

11. Perform a few scans and check image quality.

5.3 Gantry Stator Receiver (1.1Gbit/s)

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Stator Receiver.

Gantry Stator Receiver

Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly

Figure 5-29: Gantry Stator Receiver

5.3.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque Wrench

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 387

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.3.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-3:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.3.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Receiver on page 388 1hour 1

5.3.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly on page 392 1hour 1

5.3.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Receiver

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the rear cover of the Gantry.
2. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).
3. Remove the Slip Ring Cover (see Removing the Slip Ring Cover on page 62) and put it in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 388

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use Anti-Static gloves when
removing or installing the Gantry Stator Receiver.

4. Label the two Gantry Stator Receiver cables and

disconnect them (see Figure 5-30).

Figure 5-30: Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 389

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Remove the two screws that attach the Gantry Stator

Receiver Assembly bracket.(see Figure 5-31).
6. Remove Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly with the
bracket.

Figure 5-31: Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 390

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

7. Remove the two screws that attached to the Gantry

Stator Receiver assembly.
8. Remove the Gantry Stator Receiver assembly.

Figure 5-32: Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly Bracket

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 391

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

9. Remove the three screws on the face of Gantry Stator

Receiver.
10. Remove the Gantry Stator Receiver.

Figure 5-33:

5.3.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly

1. Install the new Gantry Stator Receiver to the Antenna Carrier. Torque=0.7Nm(0.5 lbf-ft.)
2. Follow the procedure in 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
3. Perform a few scans and check image quality.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 392

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.4 Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB.

Antenna Carrier with PCB

Gantry Stator Receiver

Figure 5-34: Gantry Stator Receiver

5.4.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque Wrench

5.4.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-4:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.4.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB on page 394 1hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 393

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

Table 5-4:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.4.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB on page 397 1hour 1

5.4.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the rear cover of the Gantry.
2. Remove the Gantry Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).
4. Remove the Slip Ring Cover (see Removing the Slip Ring Cover on page 62) and put it in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 394

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use Anti-Static gloves when
removing or installing the Gantry Stator Receiver.

5. Label the two Gantry Stator Receiver cables and

disconnect them (see Figure 5-35).

Figure 5-35: Antenna Carrier

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 395

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

6. Remove the two screws that attach the Gantry Stator

Receiver Assembly bracket (see Figure 5-36).
7. Remove Gantry Stator Receiver Assembly with the
bracket.
8. Remove the two screws that attached to the Gantry
Stator Receiver assembly.
9. Remove the Gantry Stator Receiver assembly.

Figure 5-36:
10. Remove the three screws that attach the Gantry
Stator Receiver to the Antenna Carrier (see Figure 5-
37).
11. Remove Gantry Stator Receiver from Antenna
Carrier.

Figure 5-37: Stator Receiver

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 396

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.4.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Antenna Carrier with PCB

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 397

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

1. Install the Gantry Stator Receiver to the new

Antenna Carrier. Torque=0.7Nm(0.5 lbf-ft.).
Adjustment Ruler
2. Install the new Antenna Carrier to its bracket.
Torque=3.5Nm (2.6 lbf-ft.).
3. Install the bracket with Antenna Carrier to the
Gantry and fix with 2 screws.
4. Insert the Adjustment Ruler (shipped with Slip Ring)
between the Slip Ring and Antenna Carrier (see
Figure 5-38).
5. Adjust the Antenna Carrier so that the center line
can align with the Slip Ring (see Figure 5-38)
6. Tighten the two screws with torque wrench.
Torque=6Nm (4.4 lbf-ft.).
7. Draw out the Adjustment Ruler.
8. Check all cable connections.
9. Install the Slip Ring Cover (see Installing the Slip
Ring Cover on page 63).
10. Install the Rear Cover (see Installing the Rear Cover
on page 59).
11. Install the Column Cover.
12. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing
the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
13. Perform a few scans and check image quality.

Figure 5-38: Stator Receiver

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 398

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.5 Gantry Stator Transceiver

This procedure explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Stator Transceiver.

5.5.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque Wrench

5.5.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-5:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.5.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Transceiver on page 399 1 hour 1

5.5.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Transceiver on page 401 1 hour 1

5.5.3 Removing the Gantry Stator Transceiver

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 399

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use Anti-Static gloves when
removing or installing the Gantry stator transceiver.

4. Label all the Gantry Stator Transceiver cables and

then disconnect them.
5. Remove the five screws that attach the Gantry Stator
Transceiver to the 4-Way Signal Brush Block
Assembly. (see Figure 5-39)
6. Remove the Gantry Stator Transceiver.

Figure 5-39: Stator Transceiver

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 400

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.5.4 Installing the Gantry Stator Transceiver

1. Install the new Gantry Stator Transceiver Assembly, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Check all cable connections.
3. Install the Slip Ring Cover (see Installing the Slip Ring Cover on page 63).
4. Install the Column Cover.
5. Install the Rear Cover (see Installing the Rear Cover on page 59).
6. Perform a few scans.
7. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

5.6 Rotor Data Transmitter

The Rotor Data Transmitter is located at the back of the Slip Ring, (see Figure 5-40 below)

Figure 5-40: Rotor Data Transmitter

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 401

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.6.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque Wrench

5.6.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-6:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.6.3 Removing the Rotor Data Transmitter on page 402 1 hour 1

5.6.4 Installing the Rotor Data Transmitter on page 404 1 hour 1

5.6.3 Removing the Rotor Data Transmitter

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use Anti-Static gloves when
removing or installing the Rotor Data Transmitter.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 402

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Disconnect the Fiber Cable and Power Cable

between Rotor Data Transmitter and Rotor
Transceiver Board (see Figure 5-12).
Note: Attach the cables with tie-wraps.

Figure 5-41: Slip Ring Back Cables

6. Remove the 3 screws which are attach the Rotor Data

Transmitter to the Slip Ring (see Figure 5-42).

Figure 5-42: Slip Ring Plate Back Transmitter

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 403

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.6.4 Installing the Rotor Data Transmitter

1. Install the new Rotor Data Transmitter Board following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

5.7 Rotor Transceiver Board

The Rotor Transceiver Board is located at the back of the Slip Ring. (see Figure 5-43 below).

Figure 5-43: Rotor Transceiver Board

5.7.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools
• Torque Wrench

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 404

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.7.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-7:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.7.3 Removing the Rotor Transceiver Board on page 405 1 hour 1

5.7.4 Installing the Rotor Transceiver Board on page 407 1 hour 1

5.7.3 Removing the Rotor Transceiver Board

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use Anti-Static gloves when
removing or installing the Rotor Transceiver Board.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 405

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Disconnect the cables (see Figure 5-44).

Note: Attach the cables with tie-wraps.
6. Remove the 4 screws which are attach the Rotor Data
Transmitter to the Slip Ring

Figure 5-44: Slip Ring Back Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 406

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.7.4 Installing the Rotor Transceiver Board

1. Install the new Rotor Transceiver Board following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

5.8 Power Brush Block Assembly

This procedure explains how to remove and install the Power Brush Block PCB Assembly.

Figure 5-45: Power Brush Block PCB

5.8.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 407

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.8.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-8:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.8.3 Removing the Power Brush Block Assembly on page 408 1 hour 1

5.8.4 Installing the Power Brush Block Assembly on page 410 2 hour 1

5.8.3 Removing the Power Brush Block Assembly

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

!
WARNING: Never touch the Slip Ring with your bare hands. Always use Anti-Static gloves when
removing or installing the Power brush block assembly.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 408

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Label all the cables connected to Power Brush Board.

6. Disconnect all the Brush Board cables.

Note: Record the brushes location which you

removed.
7. Remove the Power Brushes and Signal Brushes(see
Figure 5-46).
Power Brushes
!
WARNING: To avoid damaging all the brushes, remove the
Signal Brushes and Power Bushes before touching
the Power Brush Board.
Signal Brushes

8. Remove the four screws which attach the Power Brush

Block and remove the Power Brush Block (see Figure 5-
46).

Figure 5-46: Power Brush Block

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 409

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.8.4 Installing the Power Brush Block Assembly

1. Install the new Power Brushes Block to the Gantry (see Figure 5-47) with four screws (do not tighten).

Figure 5-47: Mount Power Brush Block Figure 5-48: New Power Brush Block

!
WARNING: To avoid damaging all the brushes install the signal brushes and power bushes after
fixing the Power brush board.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 410

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

!
CAUTION: When checking the clearance with
the feeler gauge, carefully move
the feeler gauge in order not to
damage the slip ring. Feeler Gauge
2. Use 0.2mm and 0.25mm feeler gauge to check the
clearance between the Power Brush Block metal pipe
end and Slip Ring Plate. It should meet the following
two conditions at the same time (see Figure 5-49).
• 0.2mm feeler gauge can be inserted
• 0.25mm feeler gauge cannot be inserted

Figure 5-49:

3. Tighten the four screws that mount the Power Brushes Block PCB. Torque=6Nm (4.4 lbf-ft.).
4. Install all the signal bushes and power brushes on the new Power Brushes Block (see Figure 5-48).
5. Connect the Power Cables to the Power Brushes Board, and fix them to its original position with tie-
wraps.
6. Check all cable connections.
7. Install the Slip Ring Cover (see Installing the Slip Ring Cover on page 63).
8. Install the Rear Cover (see Installing the Rear Cover on page 59).
9. Install the Column Cover (see Installing the Column Covers on page 46)
10. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 411

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.9 Stationary Encoder Unit

This section explains how to remove and replace the Stationary Encoder Unit Board.

Figure 5-50: Stationary Encoder Unit Board

5.9.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

5.9.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-9:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.9.3 Removing the Stationary Encoder Unit on page 413 1 hour 1

5.9.4 Installing the Stationary Encoder Unit on page 414 1 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 412

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.9.3 Removing the Stationary Encoder Unit

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Gantry Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 43).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the rear cover of the Gantry.

3. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover

4. Disconnect the cable connected to the Stationary
Encoder Unit Board.
5. Remove the four screws which attach the Stationary
Encoder Unit Board and remove it from the bracket
(see Figure 5-51 on page 413).

Figure 5-51: Stationary Encoder Unit

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 413

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.9.4 Installing the Stationary Encoder Unit

1. Install the new Stationary Encoder Unit Board following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

5.10 Rotating Encoder Unit

This section explains how to remove and replace the Rotating Encoder Board.

Figure 5-52: Rotating Encoder Unit

5.10.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 414

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.10.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-10:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

5.10.3 Removing the Rotating Encoder Unit on page 415 1 hour 1

5.10.4 Installing the Rotating Encoder Unit on page 416 1 hours 1

5.10.3 Removing the Rotating Encoder Unit

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Gantry Column Cover(see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 415

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the rear cover of the Gantry.

3. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover

4. Remove the one screw which secures the Rotating
Encoder Unit. (see Figure 5-53 on page 416)
5. Disconnect the cable connected to the Rotating
Encoder Unit Board.
6. Take the Rotating Encoder out carefully from
between the Slip Ring and Transceiver Board
ROTOR.

Figure 5-53: Rotation Encoder Unit

5.10.4 Installing the Rotating Encoder Unit

1. Install the new Rotating Encoder Unit Board following the removal procedure in reverse.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 416

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

2. Adjust Zero Index Pin to ensure the position of Rotating Encoder Unit is proper, which is on the right
of gantry rotor when facing the rear gantry cover. Refer to Access CT Calibration and Adjustment
Instructions(see Figure 5-54 on page 417).

Figure 5-54: Zero Index Pin

Zero Index Pin

3. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

5.11 Breathing Navigation Board

The following procedure instructs how to remove and replace the Breathing Navigation Board.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 417

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

There are two types of Breathing Navigation Board:

• Type A:

Figure 5-55: Breathing Navigation Board-Type A

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 418

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

• Type B:

Figure 5-56: Breathing Navigation Board-Type B

5.11.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

5.11.2 Estimated Time

Table 5-11:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing the Breathing Navigation Board Type A on page 420 0.5 hour 1

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type A on page 422 0.5 hour 1

Removing Breathing Navigation Board Type A on page 423 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 419

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

Table 5-11:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B on page 423 0.5 hour 1

Removing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B on page 427 0.5 hour 1

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B on page 428 0.5 hour 1

5.11.3 Replacing Breathing Navigation Board Type A with Type A

Removing the Breathing Navigation Board Type A

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the rear cover of the Gantry.
2. Remove the Gantry Column Cover(see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 420

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

3. Unplug the connector between G-host and Breathing Navigation Board Type A (see Figure 5-57).

Figure 5-57: Unplug the connector

4. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).
5. Cut Off the cable tie-wraps that fix the cable of Breathing Navigation Board Type A.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 421

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

6. Disconnect the cable connected to the Breathing Navigation Board Type A(see Figure 5-58).
7. Remove the four screws which attach the Breathing Navigation Board and remove it(see Figure 5-58).

Figure 5-58: Breathing Navigation Board Type A

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type A

1. Install the new Breathing Navigation Board Type A following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 422

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.11.4 Replacing Breathing Navigation Board Type A with Type B

Removing Breathing Navigation Board Type A

Remove the Breathing Navigation Board, refer to Removing the Breathing Navigation Board Type A on
page 420.

Note: The bracket is also removed together with the Breathing Navigation Board Type A.

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B

1. Install the Rubber sleeve directly on the Breathing Navigation Board Type B (see Figure 5-59).

Figure 5-59: Install the Rubber sleeve on the Breathing Navigation Board Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 423

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

2. Assemble the Breathing Navigation Board Type B with its new bracket.
3. Install the assembled Breathing Navigation Board Type B on the Rear Cover with four screws (see
Figure 5-60).

Figure 5-60: Install the Breathing Navigation Board Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 424

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

4. Connect the cable to the Breathing Navigation Board Type B (see Figure 5-61).
5. Secure the cable with cable tie-wraps (see Figure 5-61).

Figure 5-61: Secure the Breathing Navigation Board Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 425

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

6. Plug the connector between G-host and Breathing Navigation Board Type B (see Figure 5-62).

Figure 5-62: Plug the connector

7. Install the Rear Cover (see Installing the Rear Cover on page 56).
8. Install the Gantry Column Cover(see Installing the Column Covers on page 46)
9. Perform the procedures in section 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 426

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5.11.5 Replacing Breathing Navigation Board Type B with Type B

Removing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Wait at least 10 minutes after powering down the system for the Slip ring to discharge.

WARNING: Take all electrical precautions after removing the rear cover of the Gantry.
2. Remove the Gantry Column Cover(see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Unplug the connector between G-host and Breathing Navigation Board Type B (see Figure 5-57).

Figure 5-63: Unplug the connector

4. Remove the Gantry Rear Cover (see Removing the Rear Cover on page 55).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 427

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Rear FRUs

5. Cut Off the cable tie-wraps that fix the cable of Breathing Navigation Board Type B.
6. Disconnect the cable connected to the Breathing Navigation Board Type B.
7. Remove the four screws which attach the Breathing Navigation Board and remove it together with its
bracket.(see Figure 5-64).

Note: Keep the removed Rubber sleeve and bracket, and reuse them when installing the new Breathing
Navigation Board Type B if necessary.

Figure 5-64: Breathing Navigation Board Type B

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B

Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type B, refer to Installing the Breathing Navigation Board Type
B on page 423.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 428

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 429

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

This section describes the removal and replacement

procedure for the components on the Gantry Left
Column:
1. GPC Assembly on page 459 1
2
2. Manual Operation Panel ASSY on page 495
3. Stator Control Board on page 487
7
4. Switching Power Supply (G101 or G102) on page
431
5. Switching Power Supply Isolation Transformer
on page 454
6. Gantry Interface Board on page 489
7. G-Host ASSY on page 456
1
8. Gantry Interlock Switch on page 497
6

Figure 6-1: Gantry Left Column

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 430

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.1 Switching Power Supply (G101 or G102)

The following procedure explains how to remove and replace the Switching Power Supply.

Terminal
X103

5/12/24V DC
Power Supply
Isolation (G102)
Transformer

Switching 24V
Power Supply
(G101)

Figure 6-2: Switching Power Supply

There are two types of Switching Power Supply G101 on site:
• Type A: T120B
• Type B: RT125-B
There are two types of Switching Power Supply G102 on site:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 431

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

• Type A: SP-75-24

Figure 6-3: Switching Power Supply G102 (SP-75-24) Type A

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 432

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

• Type B: RSP-75-24

Figure 6-4: Switching Power Supply G102 (RSP-75-24) Type B

6.1.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

6.1.2 Estimated Time

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 433

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Table 6-1: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A with Type A

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A on page 435 1 hour 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A on page 438 1 hour 1 person

Table 6-2: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B with Type B

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B on page 441 1 hour 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B on page 444 1 hour 1 person

Table 6-3: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A with Type B

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A on page 447 1 hour 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B on page 447 1 hour 1 person

Table 6-4: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type A

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A on page 447 1 hour 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A on page 450 1 hour 1 person

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 434

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Table 6-5: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type B

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A on page 451 0.5 hour 1 person

Installing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B on page 451 40 minutes 1 person

Table 6-6: Estimated time for Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B with Type B

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B on page 453 0.5 hour 1

Installing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B on page 453 40 minutes 1

6.1.3 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A with Type

Removing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove Left Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 43).
3. Label the cables connected to the left side of Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer(see Figure 6-5).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 435

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. Disconnect the cables to Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer(see Figure 6-5).

Terminal
X103

Cable
Connect To
Isolation
Transformer

Figure 6-5: Switching Power Supply (Example)

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 436

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

5. Remove the four screws which attach the Switching Power Supply Bracket to the Left Column (see
Figure 6-6) and remove the Switching Power Supply.

Figure 6-6: Switching Power Supply Bracket

6. Label the cables connected to the Switching Power Supply to be replaced and disconnect the cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 437

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

7. Remove the screws which attach the Switching Power Supply to bracket and remove it (see Figure 6-
7).

G101 screws

G102 screws

Figure 6-7: Switching Power Supply Bracket

Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A

1. To install the new Switching Power Supply G101 Type A, perform the Estimated time for Replacing
Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type A on page 434 in reverse.
2. Power on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 438

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

3. Measure the voltage between the power terminal block X103-3 and X103-4 with multimeter, and
check if the voltage is within range of 5.19V-5.21V.

X103

X103-3 X103-4
Red Probe Black Probe

Figure 6-8: Example

4. If the voltage is out of range, follow the procedure below:
a. Power off the system.
b. Remove the terminal protective cover.
c. Power on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 439

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

d. Use Philips screwdriver to adjust the +5V ADJ rotary knob on the Switching Power Supply G101
Type A until the Switching Power Supply G101 Type A output voltage meets the requirement.

Figure 6-9: Example

e. Power off the system.
f. Install the terminal protective cover.
5. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 440

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.1.4 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B with Type

Removing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label the cables connected to the Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer (see Figure 6-10).

Terminal
X103

Cable Connect
To Isolation
Transformer

Figure 6-10:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 441

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. Disconnect the cables to Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer.Remove four screws that secure the
Switching Power Supply Bracket to the Left Column and remove the Switching Power Supply (see
Figure 6-11).

Figure 6-11:
5. Label the cables connected to the Switching Power Supply and disconnect cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 442

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6. Remove three screws that secure the Switching Power Supply to bracket and remove it (see Figure 6-
12).

Figure 6-12:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 443

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

7. Remove three screws that secure the Switching Power Supply to the bracket (see Figure 6-13).

Figure 6-13:
8. Put the Switching Power Supply and bracket in a safe place.

Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B

1. To install the new switching power supply, perform the Removing Switching Power Supply G101
Type B on page 441 in reverse.

Note: Replace old W102 cables with new W102 cables shipped with new FRU.
2. Power on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 444

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

3. Measure the voltage between the power terminal block X103-3 and X103-4 with multimeter, and
check if the voltage is within range of 5.19V-5.21V.

X103

X103-3 X103-4
Red Probe Black Probe

Figure 6-14: Example

4. If the voltage is out of range, follow the procedure below:
a. Power off the system.
b. Remove the terminal protective cover.
c. Power on the system.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 445

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

d. Use Philips screwdriver to adjust the +5V ADJ rotary knob on the Switching Power Supply G101
Type B until the Switching Power Supply G101 Type B output voltage meets the requirement.

Figure 6-15: Example

e. Power off the system.
f. Install the terminal protective cover.
5. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 446

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.1.5 Replacing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A with Type

Removing Switching Power Supply G101 Type A

1. Remove the Switching Power Supply G101 Type A, refer to Removing Switching Power Supply G101
Type A on page 435.
2. Remove old W102 cables from the Isolation Transformer and Terminal X103.

Installing Switching Power Supply G101 Type B

1. Install new W102 cables shipped with new FRU.
2. Install the Switching Power Supply G101 Type B, refer to Installing Switching Power Supply G101
Type B on page 444.

6.1.6 Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type

Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 447

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

3. Label the cables connected to the Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer (see Figure 6-10).

Terminal
X103

Cable
Connect To
Isolation
Transformer

Figure 6-16:
4. Remove the terminal protective cover.
5. Disconnect the cables to Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 448

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6. Remove four screws that secure the Switching Power Supply Bracket to the Left Column (see
Figure 6-17).

Figure 6-17:
7. Label the cables connected to the Switching Power Supply G102 and disconnect cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 449

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

8. Remove four screws that secure the Switching Power Supply G102 Type A to bracket (see Figure 6-
18).

Figure 6-18:
9. Remove the Switching Power Supply G102 Type A, and put it in a safe place.

Installing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A

1. Install the new Switching Power Supply G102 Type A, refer to Removing Switching Power Supply
G102 Type A on page 447 in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 450

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.1.7 Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A with Type

Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A

Remove the Switching Power Supply G102 Type A, refer to Removing Switching Power Supply G102
Type A on page 447.

Installing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B

1. Install the Switching Power Supply G102 Type B on the Switching Power Supply bracket (see
Figure 6-19).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 451

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Figure 6-19:

Note: Only three holes are used to install the Switching Power Supply Type B on bracket(see Figure 6-19).
2. Connect the cables which are available to be connected firstly.
3. Install the Switching Power Supply Bracket to the Left Column with four screws.
4. Connect the cables which connected to the Switching Power Supply G102.
5. Connect the cables to Terminal X103 and Isolation Transformer.
6. Install the protective cover.
7. Install the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 452

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

8. Power On the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
9. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

6.1.8 Replacing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B with Type

Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B

Remove the Switching Power Supply G102 Type B, the procedure is same as removing the Switching
Power Supply G 102 Type A, refer to Removing Switching Power Supply G102 Type A on page 447.

Installing Switching Power Supply G102 Type B

Install the new Switching Power Supply G102 Type B, refer to Installing Switching Power Supply G102
Type B on page 451.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 453

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.2 Switching Power Supply Isolation Transformer

The following procedure explains how to remove and replace the Power Supply Switch Isolation
Transformer (see Figure 6-20).

Isolation
Transformer

Figure 6-20: Isolation Transformer

6.2.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 454

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.2.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-7:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

6.2.3 Removing the Power Supply Switch Isolation Transformer on page 455 0.5 hour 1

6.2.4 Installing the Power Supply Switch Isolation Transformer on page 455 0.5 hour 1

6.2.3 Removing the Power Supply Switch Isolation Transformer

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System
on page 34).
2. Remove Left Column Cover (see Removing the
Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label the cables connected to the Isolation
Transformer and disconnect them.
4. Remove the four screws which attach the Isolation
Transformer to the Left Column (see Figure 6-21)
5. Remove the Isolation Transformer.

Figure 6-21: Isolation Transformer

6.2.4 Installing the Power Supply Switch Isolation Transformer

1. To install the new Isolation Transformer, perform the above procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 455

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.3 G-Host ASSY

This section explains how to remove and replace the G-host Assembly which includes the GPC and Stator
Control Board.

GPC

Stator
Control
Board

Figure 6-22: GHost ASSY

6.3.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 456

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.3.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-8:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

6.3.3 Removing the G-Host ASSY on page 457 1 hour 1

6.3.4 Installing the G-Host Assembly on page 458 1 hour 1

6.3.3 Removing the G-Host ASSY

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Left Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label the cables connected to the G-Host ASSY.

4. Remove the five screws (see Figure 6-

23) which attach the G-Host ASSY.
5. Remove the G-Host Assembly from
gantry left column.

Figure 6-23: Remove Ghost

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 457

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.3.4 Installing the G-Host Assembly

1. Install the new G-Host ASSY, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the G-Host Board Firmware download procedures. Refer to Access CT System
Programming Instructions Manual.
3. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 458

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.4 GPC Assembly

This section explains how to remove and replace the GPC Assembly.

Figure 6-24: GPC Assembly

6.4.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

6.4.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-9:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing GPC on page 460 1 hour 1

Installing GPC on page 464 1 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 459

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.4.3 GPC Replacement

This section shows how to replace GPC PCM-3362N and GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E.

!
WARNING: Before performing the replacement procedures, wear the ESD wrist strap.

Removing GPC
The following procedures provide the instruction on how to remove GPC.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 460

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

1. Power off the system (see Powering Off the

System on page 34).
2. Remove the left Column Cover.
3. Disconnect cables linked to the G-Host ASSY.
4. Remove the G-Host ASSY from the gantry see
Section 6.3.3, Removing the G-Host ASSY
Step 4 and Step 5 as the reference.

!
CAUTION: Remember the power cable
connections order (X17 Plug) to
avoid connection error.

5. Disconnect all the cables linked to the GPC ASSY.

Figure 6-25: Remove 2 screws
6. Remove the two screws from GPC(see Figure 6-
25).
7. Unscrew the two nuts on the back of G-Host (see
Figure 6-26).
8. Pull GPC off the G-Host.(see Figure 6-27).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 461

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Figure 6-26: Unscrew back nuts

Figure 6-27: Pull out GPC

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 462

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

9. Remove two copper sockets from the back of GPC (see Figure 6-28).

Figure 6-28: Remove 2 copper sockets

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 463

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing GPC
1. Remove the two nuts on the back of GPC (see Figure 6-29).
2. Replace with the new two copper sockets (see Figure 6-29).

Note: Take the two copper sockets from the Screws kit supplied with GPC

Figure 6-29:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 464

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

3. Install GPC on the stator board and secure the two front screws on GPC(see Figure 6-30).

Note: Use the two screws from the Screws kit supplied with GPC.
4. Attach the two nuts on the back of G-Host. (see Figure 6-31).

Figure 6-30: Remove 2 screws Figure 6-31: Tighten 2 nuts on back

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 465

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

5. Connect the GPC Power supply cable to the Power

In Connector (see Figure 6-32). Power In Connector
6. Install the G-Host ASSY to the Gantry left (see
Figure 6-32).
7. Connect all cables to G-Host ASSY.

Note: Ensure that all of the cables has been X11 GPC Power
connected before continuing with the
next step.
8. Power on the Gantry.

Figure 6-32: Power cable connection

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 466

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Replacing GPC PCM-3362N with GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E

This section explains how to remove and replace the GPC Assembly.

!
WARNING: Before performing the replacement procedures, wear the ESD wrist strap.

Removing GPC PCM-3362N

1. Remove GPC PCM-3362N. Refer to Removing GPC on page 460.
2. Place GPC PCM-3362N in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 467

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E

1. Remove two nuts on the back of GPC PCM-3365E (see Figure 6-33).

Figure 6-33: Release Two Nuts

2. Place two nuts in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 468

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

3. Install two new copper sockets (see Figure 6-34).

Figure 6-34: Two Copper Sockets

Note: The copper sockets in the Screw Kit are shipped with GPC package.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 469

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. Install two new copper sockets and secure the two front screws on GPC (see Figure 6-35).

Figure 6-35: Install the New Copper sockets

Note: The copper sockets in the Screw Kit are shipped with GPC package.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 470

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

5. Install four flat washers on the back of Stator Control Board on the marked position (see Figure 6-36).

Figure 6-36: Four Flat Washers

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 471

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6. Install four spring washers on the back of Stator Control Board on the marked position (see Figure 6-
37).

Figure 6-37: Four Spring Washers

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 472

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

7. Install four nuts on the back of Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-38).

Figure 6-38: Four Nuts

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 473

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

8. Connect the GPC Power Supply cable to the Power In Connector (see Figure 6-39).

Figure 6-39: Connect GPC Power Supply Cable

Power In Connector
X11 GPC Power

X10 GPC Power

Note: GPC Power Supply cable is shipped with GPC Assy (PCM-3365E).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 474

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

9. Install five screws to secure the Stator Control Board to the Gantry left column cover (see Figure 6-40).

Figure 6-40: Install Stator Control Board

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 475

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

10. Connect the GPC Ethernet cable to the LAN Connector (see Figure 6-41).

Figure 6-41: Connect the GPC Ethernet Cable

Note: GPC Ethernet cable is shipped with GPC Assy (PCM-3365E). Pay attention to the direction of the cable
connection.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 476

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

11. Connect all cables to Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-42).

Figure 6-42: Connect All Cables

Note: Ensure that all of the cables have been connected before continuing to the next step. Make sure that no
cables are floating.
12. Power on the Gantry.
13. Check whether the firmware version is the latest one. If not, perform the GPC Firmware download
procedures. Refer to Access CT System Programming Instructions Manual.
14. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 477

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Firmware
1. Program the firmware.

!
CAUTION: Check the console software version before loading firmware. Programming with the wrong
firmware version may damage the GPC and it will need to be replaced with a new one.
The firmware information is shown as below.
Table 6-10: Firmware

Firmware CD GPC File Name Can be used on GPC

Firmware CD V2.0.0.06 ULC16GPC_1.0.0.1536 GPC PCM-3362N

Firmware CD V2.0.0.07 ULC16GPC_1.0.0.1539 GPC PCM-3362N and GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 478

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Replacing GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E with GPC PCM-3365E-

S3A1E
This section explains how to remove and replace the GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E with the same type.

!
WARNING: Before performing the replacement procedures, wear the ESD wrist strap.

Removing GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E

1. Power off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Gantry left column cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Disconnect all cables linked to the Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-43).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 479

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. Remove five screws that secure the Stator Control Board from the Gantry left column cover (see
Figure 6-43).

Figure 6-43: Remove Four Screws

!
CAUTION: Remember the Power cable connections order in case to avoid connection error.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 480

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

5. Disconnect all cables linked to the GPC ASSY (see Figure 6-44).

Figure 6-44: Disconnect All Cables

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 481

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6. Remove four nuts on the back of the Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-45).

Figure 6-45: Remove Four Nuts

7. Place four nuts in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 482

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

8. Remove four spring washers on the back of Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-46).

Figure 6-46: Remove Four Spring Washers

9. Place four spring washers in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 483

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

10. Remove four flat washers on the back of Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-47).

Figure 6-47: Four Flat Washers

11. Place four flat washers in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 484

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

12. Take the GPC from the Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-48).

Figure 6-48: Pull the GPC Off the G-Host

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 485

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E

1. Install GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E. Refer to Installing GPC PCM-3365E-S3A1E on page 468.
2. Check whether the firmware version is the latest one. If not, perform the GPC Firmware download
procedures. Refer to Access CT System Programming Instructions Manual.
3. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 486

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.5 Stator Control Board

This section explains how to remove and replace the Stator Control Board (see Figure 6-49).

GPC

Stator
Control
Board

Figure 6-49: Stator control board

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 487

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.5.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

6.5.2 Estimated Time

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

6.5.3 Removing the Stator Control Board on page 488 1 hour 1

6.5.4 Installing the Stator Control Board on page 488 1 hour 1

6.5.3 Removing the Stator Control Board

1. Remove the G-Host Assembly (see G-Host ASSY on page 456).
2. Remove the GPC Assembly (see GPC Assembly on page 459).

6.5.4 Installing the Stator Control Board

1. Install the GPC, following the removal procedure in reverse. (see GPC Assembly on page 459).
2. Install the new stator control board with GPC, following the removal procedure in reverse. (see G-
Host ASSY on page 456).
3. Perform the Stator Control Board Firmware download procedures. Refer to Access CT System
Programming Instructions Manual.
4. Perform 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 488

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.6 Gantry Interface Board

This section explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Interface Board.
There are two types of Gantry Interface Board, Type A (see Figure 6-50) and Type B (see Figure 6-51).

Figure 6-50: Gantry Interface Board Type A

Figure 6-51: Gantry Interface Board Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 489

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.6.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

6.6.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-11:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing the Gantry Interface Board Type A on page 490 1 hour 1

Installing the Gantry Interface Board Type A on page 491 1 hour 1

Removing the Gantry Interface Board Type A on page 491 1 hour 1

Installing the Gantry Interface Board Type B on page 493 1 hour 1

Removing Gantry Interface Board Type B on page 494 1 hour 1

Installing the Gantry Interface Board Type B on page 494 1 hour 1

6.6.3 Replacing Gantry Interface Board Type A with Type A

Removing the Gantry Interface Board Type A

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Left Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label the cables to the Gantry Interface board, disconnect all of the Gantry Interface board cables.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 490

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. Remove the six screws which attach the Gantry Interface Board (see Figure 6-52).

Figure 6-52:
5. Remove the Gantry Interface Board.

Installing the Gantry Interface Board Type A

1. Install the new Gantry Interface Board Type A, following the removal procedure Removing the
Gantry Interface Board Type A on page 490 in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

6.6.4 Replacing Gantry Interface Board Type A with Type B

Removing the Gantry Interface Board Type A

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 491

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. There are two types of connection:

a. If the GPC is connected to Gantry Interface Board(see Figure 6-53): remove these two cables on
Gantry Interface Board which are used to connect GPC and Console.

Figure 6-53: GPC Connected to Gantry Interface Board

b. If the GPC is connected to Console directly: ignore this step.
5. Remove the six screws which attach the Gantry Interface Board (see Figure 6-54).

Figure 6-54:
6. Remove the Gantry Interface Board Type A.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 492

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing the Gantry Interface Board Type B

1. Install the new Gantry Interface Board Type B with six screws.
2. Connected all cables as labeled.
3. If the Console Interface Board is connected with GPC before, follow below Step a and Step b to
connect; if the GPC is connected with Console directly, ignore this step.
a. Connect two new cables by connector (see Figure 6-55), which are shipped with new Gantry
Interface Board Type B.

Connector

Figure 6-55: Cable Connection

b. Use the new connected cable in Step a on page 493 to connect from GPC to Console directly.

New Connected Cable

Gantry Interface
Board Type B

Figure 6-56: New Gantry Interface Board Connection

4. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 493

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.6.5 Replacing Gantry Interface Board Type B with Type B

Removing Gantry Interface Board Type B

Figure 6-57:
5. Remove the Gantry Interface Board.

Installing the Gantry Interface Board Type B

1. Install the new Gantry Interface Board Type A, following the removal procedure Removing Gantry
Interface Board Type B on page 494 in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 494

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.7 Manual Operation Panel ASSY

This section explains how to remove and replace the Manual Operation Panel ASSY.

6.7.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

6.7.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-12:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

6.7.3 Removing the Manual Operation Panel on page 496 0.5 hour 1

6.7.4 Installing the Manual Operation Panel on page 496 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 495

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.7.3 Removing the Manual Operation Panel

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System
on page 34).
2. Remove the Left Column Cover (see Removing the
Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label all the Manual Operation Panel cables and
connections.
4. Disconnect the Cable from Stator Control Board.
5. Remove the two screws which attach the Manual
Operation Panel ASSY (see Figure 6-58).
6. Remove the Manual Operation Panel ASSY.

Figure 6-58: Manual Operation Panel ASSY

6.7.4 Installing the Manual Operation Panel

1. Install the new Manual Operation Panel ASSY follow the removal procedures in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 496

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.8 Gantry Interlock Switch

This section explains how to remove and replace the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY.
There are three types of Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY, type A (see Figure 6-59), type B (see Figure 6-60),
and type C(see Figure 6-61).

Note: Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A only can be replaced with Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B
and Type C.

Figure 6-59: Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY-Type A

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 497

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Figure 6-60: Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY-Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 498

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

With spring to
enlarge the
expansion distance

Figure 6-61: Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY-Type C

6.8.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 499

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.8.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-13: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A with Type B

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A on page 501 0.5 hour 1

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B on page 503 1.0 hour 1

Table 6-14: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A with Type C

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A on page 513 0.5 hour 1

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C on page 513 1.0 hour 1

Table 6-15: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B with Type B

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B on page 517 0.5 hour 1

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B on page 518 1.0 hour 1

Table 6-16: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B with Type C

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B on page 518 0.5 hour 1

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C on page 518 1.0 hour 1

Table 6-17: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C with Type C

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C on page 518 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 500

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Table 6-17: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C with Type C

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C on page 519 1.0 hour 1

6.8.3 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A with Type

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Left Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the two screws which attach Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A (see Figure 6-62)
4. Disconnect the two Cables from Gantry Interlock Switch(see Figure 6-62).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 501

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Note: Please note the cable connection sequence(see Figure 6-62).

Figure 6-62: Remove Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A

5. Remove the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A and place it in a safe location.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 502

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B

1. Install the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B plate on Gantry with two screws(see Figure 6-63).

Limit Position

Figure 6-63: Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B Plate

Note: Ensure the plate is installed to the limit position as shown in Figure 6-63.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 503

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

2. Connect the two cables of Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B(see Figure 6-64).

Figure 6-64: Cable Connection of Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 504

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

3. Install Gantry Interlock Switch Type B on plate directly to ensure they are totally matched(see
Figure 6-65)

Figure 6-65: Install Gantry Interlock Switch Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 505

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

4. Fasten Gantry Interlock Switch Type B on plate with two screws(see Figure 6-66).

Figure 6-66: Fasten Gantry Interlock Switch Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 506

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

5. Test the Gantry Interlock Switch to ensure it works well:

a. Press the Gantry Interlock Switches to the end on both sides.
b. Power on the system, refer to Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
c. Host Computer login: Navigate to Processing> Service> Advanced> Hardware Test.
d. Check the Front Cover Opened status when pointing Rotation Status.(see Figure 6-67).

Figure 6-67:
e. If the Front Cover Opened status displays 0, the Gantry Interlock Switch works well.
6. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
7. Install the Left Column Cover, refer to Installing the Column Covers on page 46,to ensure it is
installed tightly with Gantry Front Cover, without any movement.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 507

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Note: If install the Right Column Cover, ensure it is installed tightly with Gantry Rear Cover, without any
movement.
• If there is gap between the Left Column Cover and Gantry Front Cover, proceed the following steps to
adjust:
a. Measure the distance from Gantry Front Cover to Left Column Cover top surface. (see Figure 6-68).

Figure 6-68: Measurement

Note: Column Cover thickness is 11mm.

b. Deduct Left Column Cover thickness to obtain the gap distance.For example, if the distance from
Gantry Front Cover to Left Column Cover top surface is 15mm, column thickness is 11mm, the gap
distance is 4mm.
c. Loosen the two screws which attach the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B to Gantry(see
Figure 6-69).

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 508

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

d. Move the Gantry Interlock Switch Assembly ASSY Type B inside according to the gap distance(see
Figure 6-69).

Figure 6-69: Move the Gantry Interlock Switch Assembly Type B Inside

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 509

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

e. Install the left Column Cover, refer to Installing the Column Covers on page 46,to ensure it is
tightly installed on Gantry Front Cover, without any movement(see Figure 6-70).

Figure 6-70:
8. Test the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B working status:

Note: Ensure the two Gantry Interlock Switches on right and left sides are installed properly, both Column
Covers are tightly installed on Gantry Covers, without any movement.
a. Power on the system, refer to Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39;

b. Host Computer login: Navigate to Processing> Service> Advanced> Hardware Test.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 510

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

c. Check the Front Cover Opened status when pointing Rotation Status.(see Figure 6-71)

Figure 6-71:

d. If the Front Cover Opened status displays 0 (see Figure 6-71): the Gantry Interlock Switch is
available with Column Cover tightly closed;
e. Remove the Column Covers, refer to Removing the Column Covers on page 44;

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 511

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

f. Check the Front Cover Opened status when pointing Rotation Status(see Figure 6-72).

Figure 6-72:
g. If Front Cover Opened status displays1 (see Figure 6-72): the Gantry Interlock Switch is available
without Column Covers.
9. If the working status do not meet as above, adjust the switch position and fasten it.
10. Release the Gantry Interlock Switch to normal status.
11. Perform the Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 512

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.8.4 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A with Type

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch Type A, refer to Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type A on
page 501.

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C

1. Install the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C plate on Gantry with two screws.
2. Connect the two cables of Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C.
3. Install Gantry Interlock Switch Type C on plate directly to ensure they are totally matched.
4. Fasten Gantry Interlock Switch Type C on plate with two screws.
5. Test the Gantry Interlock Switch to ensure it works well:
a. Press the Gantry Interlock Switches to the end on both sides.
b. Power on the system, refer to Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.
c. Host Computer login: Navigate to Processing> Service> Advanced> Hardware Test.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 513

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

d. Check the Front Cover Opened status when pointing Rotation Status.(see Figure 6-67).

Figure 6-73:
e. If the Front Cover Opened status displays 0, the Gantry Interlock Switch works well.
6. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
7. Install the Column Covers, refer to Installing the Column Covers on page 46,to ensure it is installed
tightly with Gantry Front Cover, without any movement.

IMPORTANT: Ensure the two Gantry Interlock Switches on right and left sides are installed properly, both
Column Covers are tightly installed on Gantry Covers, without any movement.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 514

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

8. Test the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C working status:

a. Power on the system, refer to Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39;

b. Host Computer login: Navigate to Processing> Service> Advanced> Hardware Test.

c. Check the Front Cover Opened status when pointing Rotation Status.(see Figure 6-74)

Figure 6-74:

d. If the Front Cover Opened status displays 0 (see Figure 6-74): the Gantry Interlock Switch is
available with Column Cover tightly closed;
e. Remove the Column Covers, refer to Removing the Column Covers on page 44;

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 515

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

f. Check the Front Cover Opened status when pointing Rotation Status(see Figure 6-75).

Figure 6-75:
g. If Front Cover Opened status displays1 (see Figure 6-75): the Gantry Interlock Switch is available
without Column Covers.
9. Release the Gantry Interlock Switch to normal status.
10. Perform the Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 516

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.8.5 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B with Type

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Left Column Cover Removing the Column Covers on page 44.
3. Remove the two screws which attach Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B (see Figure 6-76).
4. Disconnect the two Cables from Gantry Interlock Switch(see Figure 6-76).

Gantry Side
Cover Filter

Figure 6-76: Remove the Gantry Interlock Switch Type B

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 517

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B

1. Install the Gantry Interlock Switch Type B, following the removal procedures in reverse.
2. Perform the Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

6.8.6 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B with Type

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B

Remove the Gantry Interlock Switch Type B, refer to Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type B on
page 517.

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C

1. Installing the Gantry Interlock Switch Type C, refer to Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type
C on page 513.
2. Perform the Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

6.8.7 Replacing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C with Type

Removing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).
2. Remove the Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers ).
3. Remove the two screws which attach Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C.
4. Disconnect the two Cables from Gantry Interlock Switch.

Note: Please note the cable connection sequence.

5. Remove the Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C and place it in a safe place.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 518

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type C

1. Installing the Gantry Interlock Switch Type C, refer to Installing Gantry Interlock Switch ASSY Type
C on page 513.
2. Perform the Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 519

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.9 Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter

This section explains how to remove and install the Gantry Side Cover Filter.

Nilon Sticker
(Hook)

Figure 6-77: Gantry Side Cover Filter

6.9.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 520

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

6.9.2 Estimated Time

Table 6-18: Estimated time for Replacing Gantry Side Cover Filter

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

6.9.3 Removing the Gantry Side Cover Filter on page 521 20 minutes 1

6.9.4 Installing the Gantry Side Cover Filter on page 522 20 minutes 1

6.9.3 Removing the Gantry Side Cover Filter

1. Power Off the system. Refer to Powering Off the System on page 34.
2. Remove the Column Cover, refer to 2.2.1 Removing the Column Covers on page 44, and put it in a
safe place.
3. Tear off the Gantry Side Cover Filter.

Figure 6-78: Tear off the Gantry Side Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 521

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Left Column FRUs

Note: If the Nilon Sticker (Hook) is torn off together with the Gantry Side Cover Filter, replace the both together.

Figure 6-79: Nilon Sticker (Hook)

6.9.4 Installing the Gantry Side Cover Filter

Install the Gantry Side Cover Filter, follow6.9.3 Removing the Gantry Side Cover Filter on page 521 in
reverse.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 522

This section describes the removal and replacement procedure for the components on the Gantry Right
Column:

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 523

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

1. Power Control Board on page 531

2. Terminal Block Assy (RCT4F) on
page 530
3. Surge Suppressor on page 524
5 1
4. Circuit Breaker on page 528
5. AC Contactor (KM101,
KM102,KM104) on page 526
2

5 3

Figure 7-1: Gantry Right Column

7.1 Surge Suppressor

This section explains how to remove and replace the Surge Suppressor.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 524

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.1.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

7.1.2 Estimated Time

Table 7-1:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

7.1.3 Removing the Surge Suppressor on page 525 0.5 hour 1

7.1.4 Installing the Surge Suppressor on page 526 0.5 hour 1

7.1.3 Removing the Surge Suppressor

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System
on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the

Gantry is Off.
2. Remove the Right Column Cover (see Removing the
Column Covers on page 44).
3. Pull out the Surge Suppressor (see Figure 7-2).

Note: The black Surge Suppressor is Neutral,

the red Surge Suppressors are Phases.

Figure 7-2: Surge Suppressor

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 525

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.1.4 Installing the Surge Suppressor

1. Install the new Surge Suppressor, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

7.2 AC Contactor (KM101, KM102,KM104)

This section explains how to remove and replace the Three Phase AC Contactor (KM101, KM102,KM104).

7.2.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

7.2.2 Estimated Time

Table 7-2:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

7.2.3 Removing the Three Phase AC Contactor on page 526 0.5 hour 1

7.2.4 Installing the Three Phase AC Contactor on page 527 0.5 hour 1

7.2.3 Removing the Three Phase AC Contactor

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 526

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

KM101
KM102

KM104

Tap

Figure 7-3: AC Contactor

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

2. Remove the Right Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label the AC Contactor cables and disconnect them.
4. Pull down the Tap at the bottom of the AC Contractor(see Figure 7-3) and remove it.

7.2.4 Installing the Three Phase AC Contactor

1. Install the new AC Contactor, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 527

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.3 Circuit Breaker

This section explains how to remove and replace the Circuit Breaker (QF102, QF104, QF105, QF106,
QF107).

• QF102 power to Gantry Rotor System

• QF104 power to Rotation
• QF105 power to Stator DC Component
• QF106 power to Patient Table
• QF107 power to Console

Figure 7-4: Circuit Breaker

7.3.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

7.3.2 Estimated Time

Table 7-3:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

7.3.3 Removing the Circuit Breaker on page 529 0.5 hour 1

7.3.4 Installing the Circuit Breaker on page 529 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 528

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.3.3 Removing the Circuit Breaker

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

2. Remove the Right Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Label the cables which connected to the Circuit
Breaker, and disconnect the cables.
4. Pull down the tap and remove the Circuit Breaker
(see Figure 7-5).

Figure 7-5: Circuit Breaker

7.3.4 Installing the Circuit Breaker

1. To install the new Circuit Breaker follow the procedures above in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 529

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.4 Terminal Block Assy (RCT4F)

This section explains how to remove and replace the Terminal Block Assy.

Figure 7-6: Terminal Block Assy (RCT4F)

7.4.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

7.4.2 Estimated Time

Table 7-4:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

7.4.3 Removing the Terminal Block Assy on page 531 0.5 hour 1

7.4.4 Installing the Terminal Block Assy on page 531 0.5 hour 1

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 530

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.4.3 Removing the Terminal Block Assy

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System
on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the

Gantry is Off.
2. Remove the Right Column Cover (see Removing the
Column Covers on page 44).
3. Pull out the Terminal Block Assy (see Figure 7-7).

Figure 7-7: Terminal Block Assy

7.4.4 Installing the Terminal Block Assy

1. Install the new Terminal Block Assy, following the removal procedure in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

7.5 Power Control Board

This section explains how to remove and replace the Power Control Board.

7.5.1 Required Tools

• FSE Standard Tools

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 531

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.5.2 Estimated Time

Table 7-5:

Procedure Estimated Time People Needed

7.5.3 Removing the Power Control Board on page 532 0.5 hour 1

7.5.4 Installing the Power Control Board on page 533 0.5 hour 1

7.5.3 Removing the Power Control Board

1. Power Off the system (see Powering Off the System on page 34).

WARNING: Make sure that all power to the Gantry is Off.

2. Remove the Right Column Cover (see Removing the Column Covers on page 44).
3. Remove the two screws which attach the Gantry
Power Switch Cover (see Figure 7-8).
4. Remove the Gantry Power Switch Cover.

Figure 7-8: Main Power Switch Cover

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 532

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

5. Label all of the cables connected to Power Control

Board and disconnect them.
6. Remove the four screws which attach the Power
Control Board (see Figure 7-9) and remove the
board.

Figure 7-9: Power Control Board

7.5.4 Installing the Power Control Board

1. To install the new Power Control Board follow the removal procedures in reverse.
2. Perform the 1.5 Completing the Repair or Replacement Procedures on page 39.

7.6 Gantry Interlock Switch

Gantry Interlock Switch Replacement procedure on Gantry right is the same as Gantry Interlock Switch
Replacement procedure on Gantry left. Please refer to 6.8 Gantry Interlock Switch on page 497.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 533

Copyright@ 2023 Koninklijke Philips N.V. All Rights Reserved.
ATTENTION: THIS PAGE CONTAINS COPYRIGHTED MATERIALS THAT ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND/OR PROPRIETARY. ANY RELEASE OR DISTRIBUTION OF THIS MATERIAL, WITHOUT PERMISSION, IS A VIOLATION OF LAW.
Access CT Gantry Repair and Replacement Instructions Manual Gantry Right Column FRUs

7.7 Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter

This section please refer to Replacing the Gantry Side Cover Filter on page 520.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 534

Before handing the system over to the customer:

• Put all tools away.
• Leave the site clean and orderly.
• Ensure that no one is in the scanner room.
• Run a few scans to see that the system functions properly.
• If the old/removed component is not returned, dispose of it according to local regulations.

459800863341 Rev Y CSIP Level1 535

Incisive CT System Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
Incisive CT System Installation Instructions
373 pages
Incisive CT System Installation Instructions For O-Level
No ratings yet
Incisive CT System Installation Instructions For O-Level
345 pages
Incisive CT Software Installation Instructions For O-Level (For Win 10)
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Software Installation Instructions For O-Level (For Win 10)
141 pages
Incisive CT Z840 Workspace Repair and Replacement Manual
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Z840 Workspace Repair and Replacement Manual
125 pages
Incisive CT System Programming Instructions (For Win 7)
No ratings yet
Incisive CT System Programming Instructions (For Win 7)
190 pages
X300 Troubleshooting Guide
50% (8)
X300 Troubleshooting Guide
1 page
Incisive CT Software Installation Instructions (For Win 7)
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Software Installation Instructions (For Win 7)
107 pages
Performance Access Dual
No ratings yet
Performance Access Dual
31 pages
02 Philips CT 3500 Safety Rev - 2024NOV27
No ratings yet
02 Philips CT 3500 Safety Rev - 2024NOV27
15 pages
Calibration Idt
No ratings yet
Calibration Idt
34 pages
Brilliance CT Schematics Manual
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT Schematics Manual
17 pages
Ingenuity CT / Ingenuity Core: System Installation Instructions Manual
100% (3)
Ingenuity CT / Ingenuity Core: System Installation Instructions Manual
368 pages
DR-ID - 300CL-07E PG 494
63% (19)
DR-ID - 300CL-07E PG 494
1,708 pages
access维修手册
No ratings yet
access维修手册
207 pages
Installation Manual Siemens Multix Select DR
75% (12)
Installation Manual Siemens Multix Select DR
164 pages
Brilliance CT Schematics Manual
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT Schematics Manual
12 pages
Briliance40 and 64 System Installation Manual
No ratings yet
Briliance40 and 64 System Installation Manual
240 pages
Ingenuity CT/Core/Core: System Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
Ingenuity CT/Core/Core: System Installation Instructions
402 pages
Incisive CT Z8 Workspace Repair and Replacement Instructions
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Z8 Workspace Repair and Replacement Instructions
140 pages
Mx16 Patient Table Repair and Replacement Manual
No ratings yet
Mx16 Patient Table Repair and Replacement Manual
63 pages
GE XR6000 X-Ray - Service Manual
91% (44)
GE XR6000 X-Ray - Service Manual
422 pages
Incisive CT Calibration and Adjustment Manual For O-Level Rev Q
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Calibration and Adjustment Manual For O-Level Rev Q
239 pages
Hologic Selenia Installation and Hardware Maintenance Manual Part Number MAN-00745 Revision 002
100% (10)
Hologic Selenia Installation and Hardware Maintenance Manual Part Number MAN-00745 Revision 002
236 pages
KONICA MINOLTA CS7 Installation & Service Manual
88% (17)
KONICA MINOLTA CS7 Installation & Service Manual
788 pages
MX 16-Slice CCT Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
MX 16-Slice CCT Installation Instructions
31 pages
Access Service
No ratings yet
Access Service
233 pages
AcQSim - CT - Service - Wiring
No ratings yet
AcQSim - CT - Service - Wiring
1,101 pages
Carestream DRX Ascend Carestream Service Manual
90% (10)
Carestream DRX Ascend Carestream Service Manual
100 pages
BrillianceCT Air v1-2-5 CalibrationManual
100% (3)
BrillianceCT Air v1-2-5 CalibrationManual
106 pages
Gemini GXL Installation
100% (1)
Gemini GXL Installation
228 pages
Ziehm Vision RFD 3D Service Manual
100% (22)
Ziehm Vision RFD 3D Service Manual
820 pages
Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual
95% (40)
Sedecal HF Series X-Ray Generator - Service Manual
427 pages
BR40 64 Software Installation V2.0.2 V2.0.2
100% (2)
BR40 64 Software Installation V2.0.2 V2.0.2
140 pages
CR 30-X 2nd CR 30-Xm - Service Manual For Download
100% (5)
CR 30-X 2nd CR 30-Xm - Service Manual For Download
553 pages
CR IR-392 - 04E - Prima T Service Manual
86% (22)
CR IR-392 - 04E - Prima T Service Manual
488 pages
病床安装维修
No ratings yet
病床安装维修
97 pages
Senographe DS Service Manual Class A - SM - 2385072-16-8EN - 1
100% (5)
Senographe DS Service Manual Class A - SM - 2385072-16-8EN - 1
1,810 pages
Brilliance™ CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power
No ratings yet
Brilliance™ CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power
106 pages
Fujifilm FCR Capsula X CR-IR-357 Digitizer - Service Manual
100% (3)
Fujifilm FCR Capsula X CR-IR-357 Digitizer - Service Manual
420 pages
Service Manual GE OEC Fluorostar 7900 PDF
75% (16)
Service Manual GE OEC Fluorostar 7900 PDF
123 pages
OEC One Service Manual SM 6888001-1EN 5
100% (5)
OEC One Service Manual SM 6888001-1EN 5
319 pages
PM Access Dual
No ratings yet
PM Access Dual
58 pages
SIREMOBIL Service Guide
93% (30)
SIREMOBIL Service Guide
160 pages
Prodigy 5-9, DPX Bravo and DPX Duo Service Manual
100% (2)
Prodigy 5-9, DPX Bravo and DPX Duo Service Manual
111 pages
Site Planing
No ratings yet
Site Planing
213 pages
Continuous CT Option: Site Planning Guide
No ratings yet
Continuous CT Option: Site Planning Guide
20 pages
Service Manual BV Family R1.2
90% (10)
Service Manual BV Family R1.2
123 pages
FCRGo2 - Mobile Unit ServiceManual - 014-236-01E
75% (4)
FCRGo2 - Mobile Unit ServiceManual - 014-236-01E
146 pages
## 90147101AE CMP 200 Service Manual ##
89% (9)
## 90147101AE CMP 200 Service Manual ##
388 pages
Access PM
No ratings yet
Access PM
110 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
155 pages
Ziehm 8000, Vista, Compact - Service Manual PDF
89% (9)
Ziehm 8000, Vista, Compact - Service Manual PDF
492 pages
Cios Alpha Trouble Shooting Manual
100% (4)
Cios Alpha Trouble Shooting Manual
92 pages
Acess CT Software Installation Instructions
No ratings yet
Acess CT Software Installation Instructions
124 pages
Big Bore 1.2.1 O-Level Utilities Manual
No ratings yet
Big Bore 1.2.1 O-Level Utilities Manual
90 pages
Siemens Arcadis Varic Service Manual
100% (3)
Siemens Arcadis Varic Service Manual
30 pages
Artis Zee
100% (7)
Artis Zee
318 pages
Samsung HS50A, HS60A Ultrasound - Service Manual
100% (7)
Samsung HS50A, HS60A Ultrasound - Service Manual
273 pages
Brilliance ICT System Installation Instructions - PDF Nodeid 6213964&vernum - 2
100% (2)
Brilliance ICT System Installation Instructions - PDF Nodeid 6213964&vernum - 2
553 pages
1.2.5diags - Front Page - 1
0% (1)
1.2.5diags - Front Page - 1
20 pages
B16 Parts 453567063741 Revb
No ratings yet
B16 Parts 453567063741 Revb
58 pages
Incisive CT Calibration and Adjustment Instructions
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Calibration and Adjustment Instructions
348 pages
Brilliance™ CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power
No ratings yet
Brilliance™ CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power
166 pages
Ziehm Vision - Technical Manual
100% (4)
Ziehm Vision - Technical Manual
152 pages
Mobile Network Device: 4550 191 02111 Revision D
100% (1)
Mobile Network Device: 4550 191 02111 Revision D
17 pages
Incisive CT Software Installation Instructions For 0-Level (For Win 7)
No ratings yet
Incisive CT Software Installation Instructions For 0-Level (For Win 7)
109 pages
Service Manual BV Family SMCM BV R1.1
92% (12)
Service Manual BV Family SMCM BV R1.1
112 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, and 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, and 16 Power Configurations
66 pages
# Medison System Passwords: Debug Mode Windows (DOS) Admin Mode Booting Password Product Setup Mode
75% (4)
# Medison System Passwords: Debug Mode Windows (DOS) Admin Mode Booting Password Product Setup Mode
1 page
Ingenuity Series: Ingenuity CT/Ingenuity Core/Ingenuity Core128/DEPMED
No ratings yet
Ingenuity Series: Ingenuity CT/Ingenuity Core/Ingenuity Core128/DEPMED
19 pages
Access CT: Planned Maintanance Instructions
No ratings yet
Access CT: Planned Maintanance Instructions
85 pages
Medrad Stellant D Service Manual
100% (5)
Medrad Stellant D Service Manual
127 pages
Installation Acceptance Test Document (IATD) MX16
No ratings yet
Installation Acceptance Test Document (IATD) MX16
16 pages
Resends Troubleshooting Guide V2.0 Rev B
No ratings yet
Resends Troubleshooting Guide V2.0 Rev B
72 pages
Incisive CT CCT Option Installation Instructions Manual
No ratings yet
Incisive CT CCT Option Installation Instructions Manual
63 pages
工作站
No ratings yet
工作站
50 pages
Networking Installation and Configuration: 4550 193 04251 Revision D
No ratings yet
Networking Installation and Configuration: 4550 193 04251 Revision D
55 pages
Brilliance - CT - Mx8000 - IDT - V2 2 1 - 4 2 1 - Upgrade - Instructions
No ratings yet
Brilliance - CT - Mx8000 - IDT - V2 2 1 - 4 2 1 - Upgrade - Instructions
172 pages
Rev F
No ratings yet
Rev F
61 pages
In ST Alation
No ratings yet
In ST Alation
148 pages
MX4000 Service Tools User Guide
No ratings yet
MX4000 Service Tools User Guide
94 pages
Brilliance CT: 6 / 1 0 / 1 6 / 1 6 - P / 4 0 / 6 4 / B I G - B o R e Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6 / 1 0 / 1 6 / 1 6 - P / 4 0 / 6 4 / B I G - B o R e Configurations
33 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice, 16 Power Configurations
147 pages
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice and 16 Power Configurations
No ratings yet
Brilliance CT: 6-Slice, 10-Slice, 16-Slice and 16 Power Configurations
123 pages
Installation Soft
No ratings yet
Installation Soft
87 pages
Ingenuity CT: 4.x System Hardware Programming Manual
No ratings yet
Ingenuity CT: 4.x System Hardware Programming Manual
279 pages
DC30-011 Odyssey - Q-Vision HF Generator Service Manual - Rev W
95% (20)
DC30-011 Odyssey - Q-Vision HF Generator Service Manual - Rev W
493 pages
BR40 Site Planning
No ratings yet
BR40 Site Planning
108 pages